BE (Body Electrical)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 300

Body Electrical

System
BE -2 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
GENERAL BE -3

GENERAL 5. Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected


unless you first release the lock and remove the con-
nector from its mount bracket (A).
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION E22CDB4C
A

BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay


box.

2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and


clean and tight connections.

NOTE
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the generator diodes. ETKD150B

• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the bat-


tery ground cable loosely connected or you will 6. Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
severely damage the wiring. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.

7. Always reinstall plastic covers.


3. Check the generator belt tension.

HANDLING CONNECTORS

1. Make sure the connectors are clean and have no


loose wire terminals.

2. Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with


grease (except watertight connectors).

3. All connectors have push-down release type locks


(A).

A ETKD150C

8. Before connecting connectors, make sure the termi-


nals (A) are in place and not bent.

ETKD150A

4. Some connectors have a clip on their side used to


attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
another component. This clip has a pull type lock.

ETKD150D
BE -4 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

9. Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). HANDLING WIRES AND HARNESSES

1. Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with


their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A
A 2. Remove clips carefully; don’t damage their locks (A).

A
B

ETKD150E

10. The backs of some connectors are packed with


grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease (A) is
contaminated, replace it.
ETKD150H

3. Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole
at an angle, and then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.

ETKD150F

11. Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is A
securely locked.

12. Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces ETKD150I

down.
4. After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn’t interfere with any moving parts.

5. Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and


other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.

DOWN

ETKD150G
GENERAL BE -5

6. Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not 5. Use a probe with a tapered tip.
leave grommets distorted (B).

A
B

ETKD150L

ETKD150J
FIVE-STEP TROUBLESHOOTING
TESTING AND REPAIRS
1. Verify the complaint
1. Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms.
with electrical tape. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
narrowed down the problem area.
2. After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them. 2. Analyze the schematic
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
3. When using electrical test equipment, follow the man- Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by trac-
ufacturer’s instructions and those described in this ing the current paths from the power feed through the
manual. circuit components to ground. If several circuits fail at
the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause.
4. If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
side (except waterproof connector). the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.

3. Isolate the problem by testing the circuit


Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in
step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure
is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.

4. Fix the problem


Once the specific problem is identified, make the re-
pair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures.

5. Make sure the circuit works


Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
ETKD150K
modes to make sure you’ve fixed the entire problem.
If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of
the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems
turn up and the original problem does not recur
BE -6 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION E74CECD1

This illustration is shows the LHD type.


RHD type is symmetrical. 8
9
13 1

4
2
10

3 4

6
11

12

1. Audio unit 8. Front center speaker


2. External amplifier 9. RSE (Rear Seat Entertainment)
3. Woofer speaker 10. Tweeter speaker
4. Glass antenna 11. Diversity
5. Front door speaker 12. Rear side speaker
6. Sliding door speaker 13. Rear center speaker
7. Antenna feeder cable
BTKG020A
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -7

CUSTOMER COMPLAINT ANALYSIS


CHECK SHEET E94FC2B4

TROUBLE IN ALL AM FM TAPE CD MP3 CD changer AMP Others

Always Engine start Engine Running Cold Warm Sometimes


TROUBLE OCCURS
Most of the time Engine off

Will not play Tape speed not proper Weak Squealing noise Eats tape

TYPE OF TROUBLE Display/illumination poor CD skips & jumps Tape/CD will not eject or insert

Others (Describe) :

Customer complaint contents :


OTHERS
Have you checked customer's defects :

* Using the customer complaint analysis check sheet for reference, ask the customer for as much detail as
possible about the problem.

BT1G001A
BE -8 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING

There are six areas where a problem can occur: wiring


harness, the radio, the cassette tape deck, the CD player,
and speaker. Troubleshooting enables you to confine the
problem to a particular area.

Turn ignition key to


ACC position

Turn on the radio or the


tape player 1) Place balance and fader control
to center position.
2) Set volume control to proper
Verify customer com- position.
plaint or identify symptom

Sound Radio Cassette player Noise CD player Miscellaneous

See CHART 1 See CHART 2 See CHART 3 See CHART 4 See CHART 5

Seek/scan
Faint reception Poor volume "Eating" tape
problem

See CHART 6 See CHART 7 See CHART 8 See CHART 9

LTIF001A
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -9

CHART 1

Sound

1. Radio and tape player


have no sound at all.

All speakers One speaker

N.G.
Illumination lights ? Check speaker harness
O.K.
Repair
No Blown Blown again
Check audio Replace Check short
fuse (10A) fuse circuit

O.K. Check fuse of radio Check speaker N.G.


unit. connector
Are all connectors behind O.K.
No Connect
radio and tape player prop- Connect
properly
erly connected ? correctly
Yes

Temporarily install O.K.


Is there voltage (12V) be- Check
No another speaker.
tween terminal 11 of the wire
audio connector and body N.G.
ground ? Replace
speaker
Yes

Replace radio unit


Are radio and player prop- No Reinstall
erly connected ? properly

Yes

Check connection between


output connector of radio
and car.

O.K.

Replace radio unit

LTJF001B
BE -10 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. Tape player OK but no sound from radio

Check that the antenna is O.K. O.K.


Reinsert plug, O.K. ? Inspect antenna plug
pluged into the radio.
Not O.K.
Not O.K.
Yes
Does radio alone work ? Replace radio
Insert properly
No
Does the condition get Yes Inspect antenna and
better by using the outer antenna cable, and
antenna (such as pillar replace if necessary
antenna)?
No
Replace radio

LTIF001C

CHART 2

Radio problem

Weak Poor tone

Check antenna Tune correctly. Still poor ?


Yes
Check connection of Check for shorts in speaker Not O.K.
antenna plug harness Repair harness

OK
Does the condition get Check for object lying on Not O.K.
Remove object
better by using the outer speaker and rattling
antenna (such as pillar OK
antenna)?
Still poor ?
No
Yes
Yes Replace radio
Check antenna and lead-in
for broken connectors. Yes
Replace antenna
Replace antenna Does the tester indicate an
open circuit ?
No
Is the broadcast quality the Yes
cause of poor tone quality ? The radio is not at fault

BTIF001D
CHART 3
Cassette player
AUDIO SYSTEM

Low sound or poor Will not accept


Dead
sound quality or eject tape

Not O.K. Check inside tape O.K.


Clean tape head and c
door for obstruction
apstan
Use a cotton swab dipped
Remove obstruction in isopropyl alcohol (refer
to owner's manual)
O.K. O.K.
Play test tape Play test tape Play test tape Inspect by using test tape
Not O.K. Not O.K. Not O.K. Not O.K.

INFORM CUSTOMER INFORM CUSTOMER


1. To use good quality tape. 1. To use good quality tape.
2. Don't put anything inside 2. To clean tape head and
tape door except tape capstan at intervals of no
3. Don't use C-120 type tape more than 100 hours

Remove unit Replace radio unit Replace radio unit Replace radio unit
for repair

LTJF001E
BE -11
BE -12 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHART 4

1. RADIO

Noise

Start the engine

Tune correctly, still noise ?

Yes
Not O.K.
Check connectors Fully insert connector

O.K.
Not O.K.
Check mounting screws Tighten the screws

O.K.
Is the antenna lead-in routed Yes
too close to a harness ? Reroute the antenna lead-in

No
ON OFF
Engine

When disconnecting the ant- No When disconnecting the ant-


enna lead, is there a noise ? enna lead, is there a noise ?

Yes Yes
Yes
If noise still occurs after checking Is wiring correct ? Replace radio unit
the above points, check for outside
noise sources (various accesso- No
ries, i.e. horn, wipers, etc.)
Repair harness

LTIF001F
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -13

2. TAPE

Noise

Start the engine

Not O.K.
Check ground Ground completely

O.K.
Not O.K.
Check mounting screws Tighten the screws

O.K.
O.K.
Check with another tape Tape is defective

Not O.K.
Yes
Is wiring correct ? Replace radio unit

No

Repair harness

LTIF001G

CHART 5

1. CD WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED

No Yes Insert the CD after ejecting


Can you insert a CD ? Is a CD already in the unit.
previous CD.
Yes
No
Is CD ejected approx.15mm
No Do power off reset by pulling both
after CD is inserted? O.K.
audio fuses, wait 5 minutes and
Yes re-insert the fuses with key off.
Though CD is completely inserted Then turn on the ignition key.
No Retest to see if CD can be inserted.
once, "error" is displayed and the CD O.K.
is rejected ?
Yes
Check CD.
o Is the labeled side faced downward ?
o Is the recorded face of the CD dirty ? Yes Insert the CD correctly or check
o Does moisture exist on the to see if the CD is defective.
recorded face of the CD ?
No
Replace CD player

BTIF001H
BE -14 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. NO SOUND

Does it play if a good quality CD Yes


Replace defective CD.
is inserted ?

No

Yes Return it to normal temperature, Yes


Does the "WAIT" indicator flicker ? and recheck operation. O.K.
Does it operate properly ?

No
No
Repair or replace CD player if the
combined radio cassette operates
properly.

LTIF001I

3. CD SOUND SKIPS
1) Sound sometimes skips when parking.
Yes
Is CD face scratched or dirty ? CD is defective, or clean CD.

No

Does it play properly if CD is replaced No


Repair or replace CD player.
with an existing proper CD ?

Yes

Replace CD.

2) Sound sometimes skips when driving.


(Stop vehicle, and check it.)
(Check by using a CD which is free of scratches, dirt or other damage.)

Does sound skip when the side of No Check for skipping while driving
the CD player is tapped ? and contact a service shop.

Yes

Securely mount the CD player.

LTIF001J
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -15

4. SOUND QUALITY IS POOR

Does it play properly if another good- Yes


Replace CD
quality CD is loaded ?

No

Repair or replace CD player.

5. CD WILL NOT EJECT


No
Is the ignition key at ACC or ON ? Turn the key to ON.

Yes

Is the combined amplifier or radio No


connected securely ? Securely connect.

Yes

Power ON reset.
Disconnect the 2 audio fuses, wait 5 Yes
minutes with ignition key off. Insert both Look for foreign matters in CD player.
fuses. Then turn the Ignition key ON. Such as paper labels, coins, etc.
Is CD ejected?

No

If CD does not eject, don't try


removing it.
The player may be damaged.
Therfore, contact a service shop for
repairs.

6. NO SOUND FROM ONE SPEAKER


No
Check with radio OK? Jump to Chart 1.

Yes

Does it play properly if another CD Yes


is played ? Replace CD.

No

Repair or replace the radio.

LTIF001K
BE -16 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CHART 6

Faint reception

Are both reception and static faint Yes Temporarily install another Yes
Replace speaker
even when antenna is fully length- speaker. O.K. ?
ened ?
No
No
Replace radio unit
Inspect antenna

No Temporarily install another


antenna. O.K. ?

Yes
Replace radio Inspect antenna and cable and
repair if necessary.

LTIF001L

CHART 7

Poor Volume

Does the problem disappear


No Improperly connected harness Correct the connection of the
when switching from the cas-
sette to the radio ? or connector. harness or the connector.

Yes
No
Is the tape player head O.K. ? Dirty, worn or damaged tape Clean or replace the tape
player head, improperly installed player head.
Yes
tape player head.

Check for an improperly connected Correct the connection or re-


tape player head wire or a malfunc- place the malfunctioning parts.
tion in the tape player itself.
The tape being tested must be of Use tapes which have been
good stereo quality. recorded in stereo.

LTIF001M
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -17

CHART 8

Seek/scan problem

Is antenna lead-in properly in- No


Install antenna properly
stalled ?
Yes
Check that the antenna is
inserted completely into the Not O.K.
Fully insert antenna
antenna receptacle.
O.K.
Check antenna and lead-in for
Yes
broken connectors. Tester indi- Replace antenna
cates open circuit ?
No
- Check antenna amplifier power ground.
- Check AM scan Vs FM scan
- Check antenna feeder cable connector
in middle of cable.
- Check for clear reception.

No

Is it clear?
No

Replace radio unit.


LTIF001N

CHART 9

"Eating" tape

Check capstan and pinch roller Not O.K. Clean head, capstan, and pinch roller.
for oxide and dirt build-up Use head cleaner or isopropyl alcohol
O.K.
Check for tape loose in cassette Not O.K. Tension the tape using a pen or pencil
O.K.
Check whether C-120 or longer Not O.K. Use C-30, 60, 90 tapes (C-120 tape is
tape is used very thin and delicate)
O.K.
O.K.
Check with another tape Tape is defective. Change tape
Not O.K.
Replace tape player

LTIF001O
BE -18 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SPECIFICATION E84B53BD

AUDIO

Item Specification
RADIO/Cas-
RADIO/Cas-
RADIO/EQ/CD sette/EQ/I/D
Model sette/EQ/CD/MP3
(M445) CDC/MP3
(M455)
(M455)
Power supply DC 14.4V
Rated output Max 43W x 4 3.2Vrms
Speaker impedance 4Ω x 4 10Ω
Antenna 80PF 75Ω
Tuning type PLL synthesized type
87.5~108 MHz / 100KHz (General)
Frequency range / FM
87.5~108 MHz / 50KHz (Europe)
Channel space
AM 531~160 KHz / 9KHz (General)

SPEAKER

Item Specification
Model Front Rear Tweeter - -
Input power Max 25W Max 25W Max 40W - -
Impedance 4±0.6Ω 4±0.6Ω 4±0.6Ω - -
Audio
external Front Rear Tweeter Center Sub woofer
amplifier
Input power Max 25W Max 25W Max 40W Max 32W Max 64W
Impedance 2±0.4Ω 2±0.4Ω 4±0.6Ω 2.15±0.25Ω 1.35±0.25Ω
DVD
external Front Rear Tweeter Center Sub woofer Rear center Sliding door
amplifier
Input power Max 25W Max 25W Max 40W Max 32W Max 64W Max 32W Max 32W
Impedance 4±0.6Ω 4±0.6Ω 4±0.6Ω 2±0.25Ω 1.35±0.25Ω 2±0.25Ω 2±0.6Ω

EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER

Item Audio
Power supply DC 14.4V
Output power 45W x 7ch
Speaker impedance 2 ± 0.6Ω
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -19

AUDIO UNIT

COMPONENT LOCATION EEF62BFA

AM/FM/CDP (M445)

24P Connector Antenna

24P Connector Pin Description Pin Description

1 Front left speaker (+) 13 Front left speaker (-)


2 Front right speaker (+) 14 Front right speaker (-)
3 Rear right speaker (+) 15 Rear right speaker (-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 Rear left speaker (+) 16 Rear left speaker (-)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 Illumination (+) 17 Illumination (-)
6 Steering remote control 18 Remote control ground
7 - 19 TEL MUTE
8 - 20 P-GND
9 - 21 -
10 - 22 -
11 ACC 23 Antenna B+
12 Battery + 24 Ground

LTKG021C
BE -20 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AM/FM/CASSETTE/MP3 (M455)

24P Connector Antenna

24P Connector Pin Description Pin Description

1 Front left speaker (+) 13 Front left speaker (-)


2 Front right speaker (+) 14 Front right speaker (-)
3 Rear right speaker (+) 15 Rear right speaker (-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 Rear left speaker (+) 16 Rear left speaker (-)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 Illumination (+) 17 Illumination (-)
6 Steering remote control 18 Remote control ground
7 - 19 TEL MUTE
8 - 20 P-GND
9 - 21 -
10 - 22 -
11 ACC 23 Antenna B+
12 Battery + 24 Ground

LTKG021D
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -21

AM/FM/CASSETTE/6CDC/MP3 (M465)

24P Connector Antenna

24P Connector Pin Description Pin Description

1 Front left speaker (+) 13 Front left speaker (-)


2 Front right speaker (+) 14 Front right speaker (-)
3 Rear right speaker (+) 15 Rear right speaker (-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 Rear left speaker (+) 16 Rear left speaker (-)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
5 Illumination (+) 17 Illumination (-)
6 Steering remote control 18 Remote control ground
7 Rear- arm remote control 19 TEL MUTE
8 AUX GND 20 EQ SEL
9 AUX IN(L) 21 AUX IN(R)
10 REMOTE 22 SURROUND
11 ACC 23 Antenna B+
12 Battery 24 Ground

LTKG021E
BE -22 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

INSPECTION ECCDCAE4 REPLACEMENT E115FEEC

TAPE HEAD AND CAPSTAN CLEANING 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

1. To obtain optimum performance, clean the head, and 2. Remove the center facia panel, console lower cover,
capstan as often as necessary, depending on fre- center air vent, switches, tray and heater control panel
quency of use and tape cleanness. (A). (Refer to the Body group-Crash pad)

2. To clean the tape head and capstan, use a cotton


swab dipped in ordinary rubbing alcohol. Wipe the A
head and capstan.

Head

Capstan

ATKF021F

3. Remove the mounting 4 screws then remove the au-


dio unit (A).
LTAC005A

ATKF021G

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


AUDIO SYSTEM BE -23

VIDEO JACK (DVD ONLY) REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (DVD ONLY)

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the video jack cover (A). And then remove 2. Remove the DVD rear monitor cover (A) and discon-
the video jack (B). nect the interior lamp connector.

B
A

LTKG021G ATKF071N

3. Installation is the reverse of removal. 3. Remove the DVD rear monitor (A) mounting screws
(4EA) and disconnect the DVD rear monitor connec-
tor.

ATKF071O

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -24 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SPEAKERS TWEETER SPEAKER

1. Remove the tweeter speaker (B) after removing the


REPLACEMENT EEC3E0F6 front filler trim(A) and disconnecting the connector.

FRONT SPEAKER

1. Remove the front door trim panel (Refer to the Body


group - front door).

2. Remove the front speaker (A) after removing 4 screw.

A
ATKF022G

ATKF022B

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.

REAR SIDE SPEAKER

1. Remove the rear seats (Refer to the Body group -


Rear seat door).
B
2. Remove the luggage trim after removing 4 bolts.
ATKF022D
3. Remove the rear side speaker(A) (Refer to the Body
group - Rear seat).
2. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF022C

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


AUDIO SYSTEM BE -25

WOOFER SPEAKER FRONT CENTER SPEAKER

1. Remove the rear seats. (Refer to the Body group - 1. Remove the center facia panel.(Refer to the Body
rear seats) group - crash pad)

2. Remove the luggage side trim (Refer to the Body


group - interior trim)

3. Remove the woofer speaker (A) after removing 4 A


bolts.

ATKF022H

2. Installation is the reverse of removal.


A
INSPECTION EFDEEC65

ATKF022E
1. Check the speaker with an ohmmeter. If an ohmmeter
4. Installation is the reverse of removal. indicates the correct impedance of the speaker when
checking between the speaker (+) and speaker (-) of
EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER
the same channel, the speaker is ok.
1. Remove the driver seat. (Refer to the Body group -
front seats) Specified impedance : 2~4 Ω

2. Remove the external amplifier (A) after removing 3


bolts.

A KTMB060A

ATKF022F

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -26 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ANTENNA 3. Remove the glass antenna radio amplifier (A) -


Left/Right each 1 ea- after removing radio feeder
cable (B) and amplifier wiring (C) from the glass
REPLACEMENT ECFCDCE3
antenna radio amplifier (A).
1. Remove the right C filler trim(A) and luggage side trim.
(Refer to Body group-Interior trim). A

ATKF023C

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


ATKF023A

2. Remove the diversity(C) after removing 1P connector


(A) and radio feeder cable (B).

B C

ATKF023B
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -27

INSPECTION E29A49BA

A
GLASS ANTENNA TEST

1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester


probe (B) as shown.

ETKD004K

B
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of
the glass antenna wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).

3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver con-


ductive paint (A) extending about 1/8"on both sides of
ETKD003A the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry.

2. Touch one tester probe to the glass antenna terminal


NOTE
(A) hear, and move the other tester probe along the
antenna wires to check that continuity exists. Thoroughly mix the paint before use.

ETKD004A ETKD006Z

GLASS ANTENNA REPAIR 4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.

NOTE 5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it


dry three hours before removing the tape.
To make an effective repair, the broken section must
be no longer than one inch.

1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A) with
fine steel wool, and then clean it with alcohol.
BE -28 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DIVERSITY & RADIO AMPLIFIER INSPECTION 7. Check for continuity between terminals of harness
side connector and antenna grid terminals (AM, FM).
1. Disconnect power connector 1P (A) from the diversity.
8. Check the grid lines for continuity.
2. Turn the radio ON.
Measure the voltage between the harness side power 9. When a poor radio reception is not repaired through
connector and body ground. the above inspection methods, replace the amp.
If the radio reception is still poor, check the radio cable
OK : approximately 12V (ACC+) for short and radio head unit for failure.

ANTENNA CABLE
C
B
1. Remove the antenna jack from the audio unit and an-
tenna.

2. Check for continuity between the center poles of an-


tenna cable.

ATKF023D

3. Remove the radio feeder cable from the diversity and


radio amp.

4. Check for continuity between diversity and right side


radio amp feeder cable (B).
ATJF023C
5. Check for continuity between diversity and left side
radio amplifier feeder cable (C). 3. Check for continuity between the outer poles of an-
tenna cable. There should be continuity.
6. Disconnect the 2P power connector from the glass
antenna radio amplifier.

AM/FM Terminals

1 2

ATJF023D

LTKG023E
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -29

4. If there is no continuity, replace the antenna cable.

5. Check for continuity between the center pole of an-


tenna cable and terminal of glass antenna. There
should be continuity.

ATJF023E

6. If there is no continuity, replace the antenna amplifier.

7. Check for continuity between the center pole (A) and


outer pole (B) of antenna cable. There should be no
continuity.

ATJF023F

8. If there is continuity, replace the antenna cable.


BE -30 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM E7B5EA7C

RIGHT
LEFT
3 430Ω 680Ω 1KΩ 2.5KΩ
680Ω 430Ω

CIRCUIT
VOLUME

VOLUME
DOWN
SEND

UP
7 7
2.2KΩ 1.5KΩ 1KΩ 1KΩ
VOLUME DOWN

VOLUME

MODE
MUTE

ILLUMINATION(+)
UP

GROUND SIGNAL
6 AUDIO (+5V) 6

3 2
ILLUMINATION(-)
5V
SIGNAL(-)

HANDFREE

LTKG024C
AUDIO SYSTEM BE -31

REPLACEMENT EFE5AF15 INSPECTION ECAA7B9B

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 1. Check for resistance between No.2 and No.3 termi-
nals in each switch position.
2. Remove the driver airbag module(A). (Refer to the
airbag group).

2. AUDIO H/UNIT (GND)


1 2 3. AUTO H/UNIT (SIG IN)
6. ILL (-)
3 4 5 6 7 7. ILL (+)
APKF005A

3. Remove the audio remote control switch (A) after re-


moving the steering wheel remote control switch con- LTKG024B
nector and 2 screws.
Connector Resistance
Switch
terminal (± 5%)
A MODE 2 - 3 (Left) 2.11 kΩ
MUTE 2 - 3 (Left) 3.11 kΩ
VOLUME UP 2 - 3 (Left) 4.61 kΩ
VOLUME
2 - 3 (Left) 5.81 kΩ
DOWN

ATKF024A

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -32 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH


MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH

COMPONENT LOCATION EF1D8BE5

[LHD]
[Turn signal lamp switch]
[Wiper switch]
Right

Left INT
TIME

[Lighting switch]
[Rear wiper & washer switch]

[Dimmer & Passing] [Intermittent volume]


P
HL
HU

ON OFF [M14] [Washer switch]

[Front fog switch]


[Lighting] [Wiper]

[Lighting] [Wiper]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Circuit connection
Connector Terminal Description Connector Terminal Description
Name No. Name No.
1 Head lamp passing 1 Wiper high speed
2 Head lamp high beam power 2 Wiper low speed
7 Turn signal lamp (RH) 3 Wiper parking
8 Flasher unit power 4 Mist switch
9 Turn signal lamp (LH) 5 Wiper & washer power
10 Head lamp low beam power 6 Intermittent wiper
Lighting 11 Dimmer & passing ground Wiper 7 Front washer switch
12 Front fog switch 8 -
13 Front fog switch ground 9 Rear wiper & washer ground
14 Tail lamp switch 10 Intermittent rear wiper
15 Head lamp switch 11 Rear wiper
16 Auto light switch 12 Rear washer
17 Lighting switch ground 13 Intermittent wiper volume
18 - 14 Intermittent wiper ground

LTKG031B
MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH BE -33

[RHD]

[Wiper switch] [Turn signal lamp switch]


Right
MIST

OFF N

INT
INT
TIME
Left

LOW

HI

[Rear wiper & washer switch]


[Lighting switch]

[Intermittent volume] [Dimmer & Passing]

P
HL
[Washer switch]
HU
[M14]
ON OFF

[Front fog switch]


[Wiper] [Lighting]
[Wiper] [Lighting]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Circuit connection
Connector Terminal Description Connector Terminal Description
Name No. Name No.
1 Wiper high speed 1 Head lamp passing
2 Wiper low speed 2 Head lamp high beam power
3 Wiper parking 7 Turn signal lamp (RH)
4 Mist switch 8 Flasher unit power
5 Wiper & washer power 9 Turn signal lamp (LH)
6 Intermittent wiper 10 Head lamp low beam power
Wiper 7 Front washer switch Lighting 11 Dimmer & passing ground
8 - 12 Front fog switch
9 Rear wiper & washer ground 13 Front fog switch ground
10 Intermittent rear wiper 14 Tail lamp switch
11 Rear wiper 15 Head lamp switch
12 Rear washer 16 Auto light switch
13 Intermittent wiper volume 17 Lighting switch ground
14 Intermittent wiper ground 18 -

LTKG031C
BE -34 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

INSPECTION ED80B99B 5. Select "Current data" and check the input/output con-
dition of BCM.
1. Multi function switch operates head lamps and wiper
through LIN communication with BCM.
SEDONA 06-
2. Check BCM input/output specification of multi func-
tion switch using the scan tool. If the specification is
abnormal, replace the head lamp or wiper switch.

3. If diagnosis is required on the multi function switch,


select "SEDONA" and "BCM".

SEDONA 06-

BTKG144A

BTKG311A

4. Select "In panel Module".

SEDONA 06-

LTKG144B

BTKG032A
MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH BE -35

REPLACEMENT EED00B87 [RHD]

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the steering column upper and lower shrouds B


(A) after removing 3 screws.

A A

ATKF031D

4. Remove the wiper switch (A) after disconnecting the


connector and pin(B).

ATKF031B
[LHD]

3. Disconnect the light switch(A) connector and pin(B).

[LHD] B

B
A

ATKF031D

[RHD]

ATKF031C
B

ATKF031C
BE -36 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5. Installation is the reverse of removal. LIGHTING SWITCH (AUTO LIGHT)

(RHD)
INSPECTION E8FA6896
Terminal
LIGHTING SWITCH INSPECTION 14(13) 15(14) 16(15) 17(16)
Position
With the multi function switch in each position, make sure OFF
that continuity exists between the terminals below. If conti-
nuity is not as specified, replace the multi-function switch. I

[LHD] II

AUTO
BTKG031E

LIGHTING SWITCH

(RHD)
Terminal
14(13) 15(14) 16(15) 17(16)
Position
OFF

II
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BTKG031F

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DIMMER AND PASSING SWITCH

ATKF031E
(RHD)
Terminal
[RHD] 1(9) 2(8) 10(18) 11(17)
Position
HU
HL

P
HU : Head lamp high beam
HL : Head lamp low beam
P : Head lamp passing switch
BTKG031L

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

(RHD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Terminal
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
7(1) 8(2) 9(3)
Hazard Trun signal
switch switch
BTKG031G L

OFF N

R
BTKG031M
MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH BE -37

FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH [RHD]

(RHD)
Terminal
12(11) 13(12)
Position
OFF

ON
BTKG031H

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION

With the multi function switch in each position, make sure


that continuity exists between the terminals below. If conti-
nuity is not as specified, replace the multi-function switch.

[LHD] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BTKG031N

WIPER SWITCH

(RHD)
Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
Position (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (13) (14)

MIST

OFF

INT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 LOW

HI
ATKF031G BTKG031I
BE -38 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

WASHER SWITCH

(RHD)
Terminal
5(3) 7(1)
Position
OFF
ON
BTKG031J

(RHD)
Terminal
9(9) 10(10) 11(11) 12(12)
Position
Rear washer
OFF

INT

ON

Rear washer
BTKG031K
HORNS BE -39

HORNS
COMPONENT LOCATION E2E82E28

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

1*
2*

5
4

1. Horn switch 4. Horn (High pitch)


2. Clock spring 5. Horn relay
3. Horn (Low pitch)
BTKG051A
BE -40 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HORN ADJUSTMENT E5A0C27A

Operate the horn, and adjust the tone to a suitable level


REPLACEMENT EA1CACBE
by turning the adjusting screw.

1. Remove the bolt from the high pitch horn and the low
NOTE
pitch horn and disconnect the horn connector, then
remove the horn. After adjustment, apply a small amount of paint
around the screw head to keep it from loosening.

DOWN UP

ATKF051B

ETDA050A
2. Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSPECTION E5CDF2BF

Test the horn by connecting battery voltage to the terminal


1, and ground terminal 2.
The horn should make a sound. If the horn fails to make
a sound, replace it.
KEYLESS ENTRY AND BURGLAR ALARM BE -41

KEYLESS ENTRY AND


BURGLAR ALARM
SPECIFICATION EBEEDEAE

Items Specifications
Keyless entry transmitter
Lithium 3V battery (1EA)
Power source
Transmissible distance 30m or more
Life of battery 2 years or more (at 10 times per day)
Door lock/unlock
PSD(Power Sliding Door) open/close (option)
Button PTG(Power Tail Gate) open/close (option)
Panic
Tailgate open (option)
447 MHz (EUROPE, AUSTRAILIA, MIDDLE EAST)
Transmission frequency
315.00 MHZ (GENERAL)
BE -42 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION E602ECB7

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type. Transmitter
RHD type is symmetrical.

Lock button
Unlock button PTG (Power tailgate) button
PSD (Power sliding door) button
1 Panic button

3*
9*

4*
8*

6
7

10

5*

1. Hood switch 6. Front door lock actuator


2. Burglar horn 7. Sliding door lock actuator
3. FAM (Front Area Module) 8. DDM (Driver Door Module)
4. IPM (In-Panel Module) 9. ADM (Assistant Door Module)
5. RAM (Rear Area Module) 10. Tailgate lock actuator
BTKG120A
KEYLESS ENTRY AND BURGLAR ALARM BE -43

DESCRIPTION E63DDD53 INSPECTION EC922D94

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

The keyless entry system uses a handheld transmitter and 1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body
IPM-mounted receiver to control door locks, alarm func- group - front door)
tions, Power Tail Gate (PTG) and Power Sliding Doors
(PSD). 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator.

NOTE
The receiver of the keyless entry system are built-in
the IPM(In-Panel Module).

1 2
3 4

ATKF122A

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and


ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.

Terminal
2 4
Position
Lock
Front left
Unlock
Lock
Front right
Unlock
LTKG122B
BE -44 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SLIDING DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR TAILGATE LOCK ACTUATOR (5DOORS)

1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. (Refer to the 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. (Refer to the Body
Body group - rear door) group - tailgate)

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6

ATKF122C ATKF122F

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.

Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 4 6
Position
Position
Lock
Left LOCK +
Unlock
UNLOCK +
Lock
Right LTKG122K
Unlock
LTKG122D
KEYLESS ENTRY AND BURGLAR ALARM BE -45

FRONT DOOR LOCK SWITCH SLIDING DOOR LOCK SWITCH

1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body 1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. (Refer to the
group - front door) Body group - rear door)

2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.

1 2 1 2 3
3 4 4 5 6

ATKF122A ATKF122C

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. switch position according to the table.

Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6
Position Position
Lock Lock
Front left Left
Unlock Unlock
Lock Lock
Front right Right
Unlock Unlock
LTKG122G LTKG122H
BE -46 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TAILGATE LOCK SWITCH DOOR SWITCH

1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. (Refer to the Body Remove the door switch and check for continuity between
group - tailgate) the terminals.

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3

ATKF122E

Terminal Body
1 2 3 Position 1 2 (Ground)
4 5 6
Free(Door open)

Push(Door close)
ATKF122F
ETQF180D
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. HOOD SWITCH

1. Disconnect the connector from the hood switch.


Terminal
1 2
Position
Unlock
LTKG121M

1 2

ETRF122J
KEYLESS ENTRY AND BURGLAR ALARM BE -47

2. Check for continuity between the terminals and BURGLAR HORN


ground according to the table.
1. Remove the burglar horn after removing 2 bolts and
Terminal disconnect the 2P connector from the burglar horn.
1 2
Position 2. Test the burglar horn by connecting battery power to
Hood open (Free) the terminal 1 and ground the terminal 2.

Hood close (Push)


ETBF180B

1 2
DOOR WARNING SWITCH

1. Remove driver’s crash pad lower panel. (Refer to


Body group - Crash pad)

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the door warning


switch.

1 2
3 4 5 6

KTQE530D

3. The burglar horn should make a sound. If the burglar


horn fails to make a sound replace it.

ATKF280G

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each


position according to the table.

Terminal
5 6
Key position
Insert
Removal
ETQF180F
BE -48 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TRANSMITTER 3. After selecting "CODE SAVING" menu, push "EN-


TER" key, then the screen will be shown as below.

TRANSMITTER CODE
TRANSMITTER CODE SAVE
REGISTRATION E2DD2F40

1. Connect the DLC cable of scan tool to the data link REMOVE THE IG. KEY FROM THE KEY
connector (16 pins) in driver side crash pad lower CYLINDER. CONNECT THE DLC CABLE
panel, then turn the scan tool ON. AND 16 PIN CONNECTOR OF THE VEHICLE.

S RBAGS
AIR

PRESS [ENTER], IF YOU ARE READY!

ETRF065M
P

R
N
D

4. After removing the ignition key from key cylinder, push


"ENTER" key to proceed to the next mode for code
saving. Follow steps 1 to 4 and then code saving is
completed.

KTBF121T TRANSMITTER CODE SAVE

2. Select the vehicle model and then do "CODE SAV- 1ST. TRANSMITTER SAVE
ING". PRESS THE TRANSMITTER [LOCK] BUTTON
OR [UNLOCK] BUTTON FOR 1 SECOND.
1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS

MODEL : ALL

02. ENGINE
03. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
04. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM * NO. OF CODED KEY : 0 EA
: ETRF065N
:
: TRANSMITTER CODE SAVE
07. CODE SAVING
1ST. TRANSMITTER SAVE
LTKG700I PRESS THE TRANSMITTER [LOCK] BUTTON
OR [UNLOCK] BUTTON FOR 1 SECOND.

1ST. TRANSMITTER SAVE SUCCESS!

IF YOU WANT TO SAVE THE 2ND KEY


PRESS [YES], OR NOT PRESS [NO]

* NO. OF CODED KEY : 1 EA


ETRF065O
KEYLESS ENTRY AND BURGLAR ALARM BE -49

INSPECTION EEC12182
TRANSMITTER CODE SAVE

2ND. TRANSMITTER SAVE 1. Check that the red light flickers when the door lock or
unlock button is pressed on the transmitter.
PRESS THE TRANSMITTER [LOCK] BUTTON
OR [UNLOCK] BUTTON FOR 1 SECOND. 2. Remove the battery and check voltage if the red light
doesn’t flicker.

Standard voltage : 3V

* NO. OF CODED KEY : 1 EA


ETRF065P

TRANSMITTER CODE SAVE


A
2ND. TRANSMITTER SAVE
PRESS THE TRANSMITTER [LOCK] BUTTON
OR [UNLOCK] BUTTON FOR 1 SECOND.

2ND. TRANSMITTER SAVE SUCCESS!

CODE SAVING IS COMPLETED! ATKF121S


IF YOU STOP, PRESS [ESC] KEY!!!
3. Replace the transmitter battery with a new one, if volt-
age is below 3V then try to lock and unlock the doors
* NO. OF CODED KEY : 2 EA with the transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock but-
ton five or six times.
ETRF065Q

4. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is O.K,


but if the doors don’t lock and unlock, register the
transmitter code, then try to lock and unlock the doors.

5. If the transmitter is failure, replace only the transmitter.


BE -50 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

BCM (BODY CONTROL


MODULE)
BODY NETWORK SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION E41957AB

All modules are linked a low speed CAN network.

The input information for the modules is coming from both


the CAN network and the hardware components (actua-
torsand sensors).
• FAM (Front Area Module)
- Headlamp low/high beam control (with DRL)
- Park lamp control
- Front fog lamp control
- Front turn signal lamp control
- Windshield wiper control
- Windshield deicer
- Diagnostics

• IPM (In-Panel Module)


- RKE (Remote Keyless Control)
- VAS (Voice Alarm System)
- Ignition key hole illumination
- Switch indicators control
- Panel light control
- Seat belt warning
- Auto light/DRL control (Logic)
- Windshield/Rear wiper control (Logic)
- Turn and Hazard lamp control (Logic)
- Central door lock (Logic)
- Windshield deicer timer
- Rear glass defog timer
- Gateway for ISO-9141 (K-Line)

• RAM (Rear Area Module)


- Tail lamp control
- Turn and Hazard lamp control
- Back up lamp control
- Rea fog lamp control
- Stop lamp outage detection
- Sliding door power window/Quarter glass control
- Room lamp control
- Rear wiper control
- Rear glass defog
- Fuel filler door open solenoid control

• ADM (Assist Drive Module)


• DDM (Driver Drive Module)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -51

MODULE INTRODUCTION power board and electronic board are connected with pin
blocks for the Front Area Module (FAM) and VCD (Variable
FAM/IPM/RAM consists of a power board and an elec- Connection Displacement) for the In-Panel Module (IPM)
tronic board. The power board contains circuit protec- and the Rear Area Module (RAM).
tion devices and switching devices. The electronic board
uses Intelligent Power Switching (IPS) for HS/LS load con-
trol, logic functions and CAN/K-Line communication. The

ADM
CLUSTER

IPM IMS CAN Network

FAM

RAM

DDM

LTKG145A
BE -52 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FUNCTIONS EA4110A2 HEAD LAMPS LOW BEAM FUNCTION

EXTERIOR LIGHTING FUNCTIONS 1. Necessary conditions to switch ON :


- By putting the Head lamp switch in position ’Head
The exterior lighting function has to provide the lighting lamp Low Beam’ or Auto light activation or DRL
and signalling of the vehicle; it monitors different available activation.
lights in front or at the back of the vehicle:
- Park and Tail lamps (with Side marker lamps), 2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF :
- License plate lamps, - If they are released by the Head lamp switch
- Head lamps Low Beam, (Auto light function deactivated) and if the DRL
- Head lamps High Beam, function is deactivated
- Front and Rear fog lamps (with the Rear fog lamp - If the Auto light function is active but the Auto light
switch indicator), sensor signal status is not ’HL ON’.
- Stop lamps,
- Backup lamps, 3. Functional diagram
- Turn signal and side repeater lamps.

PARK/TAIL LAMPS FUNCTION

1. Necessary conditions to switch ON :


Park Lamps
- By putting the Head lamp switch in position ’Park Head lamp Low Head lamp
Beam Sw FAM
and Tail lamp’ or ’Head lamp Low Beam’ or Auto Light MF Low Beam
switch Auto Head
light activation or DRL activation lamp Sw
IPM

2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF : Tail Lamps


License plate
- If they are released by the Head lamp switch RAM lamps
(Auto light function deactivated) and if DRL func- Side marker
tion is deactivated lamps

- If the Auto light function is active but the Auto


light Sensor signal status is OFF or Battery Saver
function is active.
LTKG146B

3. Functional diagram HEAD LAMPS HIGH BEAM FUNCTION

1. Necessary conditions to switch ON :


- By pushing down the High Beam lever switch if
• the Head lamp switch is in position ’Head
Park Lamps lamp Low Beam’ or the Head lamps Low
Park / Tail
Light MF lamp Sw FAM Beam have been turned ON by the Auto light
switch Auto Head function.
lamp Sw
IPM

Tail Lamps
- By pulling the High Beam lever switch toward the
License plate driver (Flash to pass activation)
RAM lamps
- By the DRL function activation for Canada.
Side marker
lamps
2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF :
- By pulling back the High Beam lever switch (man-
ual reset by the driver) or
LTKG146A - If the Head lamps Low Beam are turned OFF or if
the Auto light function is active but the Auto light
Sensor signal status is not ’HL ON’) or
- By releasing the Flash To Pass activation and
- If the DRL function is deactivated for Canada.
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -53

3. Functional diagram 3. During the start up of the vehicle (ignition key in posi-
tion START) :
- The Turn signal lamps activated by the turn lever
switch are temporarily turned OFF. If the time du-
Park Lamps
ration in Start position is more than 10seconds
Head lamp Low FAM Head lamp
Beam Sw Low Beam and engine running, the Turn signal lamps are
Auto Head Head lamp managed again as if the ignition key was in ON
Light MF lamp Sw High Beam
switch High Beam
IPM position,
Sw
Tail Lamps - The flashing sequence of the hazard lamps is im-
Flash TO
Pass Sw RAM
License plate mediately stopped if they have been activated by
lamps
Side marker
the hazard button. If the time duration in Start
lamps position is more than 10seconds and engine run-
High BeamLpErrorSts ning, the flashing sequence of the hazard lamps
CLUSTER Ctrl (CAN) are managed again as if the ignition key was in
RUN position,
- The flashing sequence of the hazard lamps is not
LTKG146C stopped if they have been activated by a crash
unlock.
TURN SIGNAL AND SIDE REPEATER LAMPS
FUNCTION
4. Functional diagram
1. Necessary conditions to switch ON(if they are stan-
dard) :
- By activation of Crash Unlock
- During the opening / closing of the Tail gate by Right Front Turn
the PTG Flasher input Left Turn Signal
Lamp sw
Signal lamp
FAM
- With the Remote Keyless Entry to lock / unlock Siren
Right Turn Signal
the vehicle Lamp sw
IPM Right Front Turn
- By alarm activation Signal lamp
- By panic activation with the Remote Keyless En- Hazard sw
RAM
try PTG Flasher
- By activation of the Hazard Lamp by the hazard
switch and ignition is position OFF, ACC or RUN CLUSTER
- By using the turn lever switch with the ignition
switch in the ON position.

2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF(if they are stan-


LTKG146D
dard) :
- Ignition switch in OFF position for deactivation of
FRONT FOG LAMPS FUNCTION
crash unlock flashing
- Deactivation of the alarm or at the end of the
1. Necessary conditions to switch ON :
alarm flashing sequence
- By using the stalk: Head lamp switch in position
- Deactivation of panic sequence with pushing any
’Head lamp Low Beam’ and Front Fog lamp sw
button of the Remote Keyless Entry or at the end
ON
of the panic flashing sequence
- When Auto light function activated and Auto light
- Turn lever switch command in OFF postion or ig-
Sensor signal status is ’HL ON’ and Front Fog
nition switch in OFF, ACC or START position to
lamp sw ON
stop turn lever flashing.
- The hazard switch in OFF position or ignition
switch in position START to stop the Hazard 2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF :
flashing. - When Auto light function activated and Auto light
- At the end of the Lock, Unlock and PTG flashing Sensor signal status is not ON
sequence. - When Front fog lamp sw OFF.
BE -54 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Functionnal Diagram BACKUP LAMPS FUNCTION

1. Necessary conditions to switch ON :


- When inhibit sw ’R’ read by FAM is active and
transmitted to RAM by CAN signal.
Park/Tail lamp Left Front fog
sw lamps
2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF :
Head lamp Low FAM Right Front fog
Beam Sw lamps - When inhibit sw ’R’ read by FAM is not active and
Light MF
sw AUTO Head IPM transmitted to RAM by CAN signal.
lamp sw
FR Fog lamp sw
3. Functional diagram
High Beam sw CLUSTER
FR Fog Indicator

Inhibit sw 'P'
Inhibit sw 'N'
Neutral sw IPM Back Up Lamp
LTKG146E RAM
Inhibit sw 'R'

Backup sw

ON
T/LAMP SW IPM CLUSTER
OFF

Back Up Signal Output

HEAD LAMP ON LTKG146F


or FRT FOG OFF
STOP LAMPS FUNCTION

1. Necessary conditions to switch ON the stop lamps:


- Pushing on the brake pedal.
BTKG147V
2. Necessary conditions to switch OFF the stop lamps:
- Releasing the brake pedal.

3. Functional diagram
Park/Tail lamp
sw
Head lamp Low
Beam Sw Left Front fog IgnitionSwSts
Light MF lamps
AUTO Head CAN signal Left Stop Lamp
sw
lamp sw RAM Right Front fog Stop Lamp sw RAM Right Stop lamp
IPM lamps Center High Mount
High Beam sw Stop Lamp
FR Fog lamp sw
Stop Lamp Fuse
Open Check

FAM IPM CLUSTER

BTKG147U

StopLampFuseSts (CAN)

LTKG146G
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -55

AUTO LIGHT FUNCTION 3. Functional diagram

1. The Auto light function is active when the Head lamp


switch is positioned to ’Auto’ and the Key is in RUN
position.
The auto light sensor is powered on the status ACC,
Park/Tail
START and RUN of the key position. Based on the Light MF lamp Sw FAM Head Lamps
High Beam
Auto light sensor values corresponding to the exterior switch Head lamp Low
Beam Sw
brightness level, it controls automatically the lighting
IPM
of the Park and tail lamps or / and the Head lamps
Park break Sw
Low Beam depending on the country.
Alternator L
2. Auto light Sensor detection table

Head Lamps Low


Tail Lamps
Beam
Mode
Lux Volt- Lux Volt- LTKG147W

(Lux) age(V) (Lux) age(V)


BATTERY SAVER FUNCTION
ON < 24 ± <1.77 ± Same as Tail lamps
5.2 0.08V 1. Necessary conditions to activate the Battery Saver
function:
OFF > 48 ± > 3.47 Same as Tail lamps - Do not turn off the Park/Tail Lamp when intention-
10.5 ± 0.1V ally turned on.
- If Key reminder switch is ON and Park/Tail Lamp
DRL FUNCTION switch is ON, Intentional "ON" should be reset
- If the driver’s door is open and if the key is not in
1. The Auto DRL function operates the Head lamps High the key hole whereas the Head lamp switch is still
Beam at 50% of full illumination. in position ’Park and tail lamp’ or ’Head lamp Low
The park and tail are managed by the auto light sen- Beam’, the park and tail lamps (and the Front fog
sor. lamps if turned on) are immediately turned off.

The Auto DRL function is active if: 2. Necessary conditions to cancel the Battery Saver
- The ignition switch is on RUN position function:
- The engine is running. - As soon as the Key is input into the IGN Key
- The Park brake switch is OFF. Cylinder or the Head lamp switch is put to po-
sition OFF.
2. The DRL function is inactive when one of above con-
ditions is released.
Initial Intentional "ON" is reset
Go to the initial
When the DRL function is active, the Head lamps High ON
Key Reminder
Beam can’t be turned ON, except for the Flash To sw
OFF

Pass activation.
ON
Park/Tail sw
OFF

OPEN
Driver Door
CLOSE

Park/Tail ON
Lamp OFF
Do not cut off

Auto OFF Auto OFF Intentional "ON" at key off

LTKG146H
BE -56 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Functional diagram INTERIOR LIGHTING FUNCTIONS

ROOM LAMPS

1. The room lamps are can be controlled manually using


the 3-state (ON, DOOR, OFF) switch or by the Rear
Park Lamps
Park/Tail Area Module (RAM). A main switch, located to the
lamp Sw FAM Front fog
Light MF Head lamp Low Lamps left of the steering wheel, is used as a master con-
switch Beam Sw
Front Fog
trol switch. The operating logic of the lamps will vary
lamp Sw IPM
based on the position of the main switch ON, DOOR,
Key reminder
Sw
Tail Lamps or OFF).
License plate
RAM lamps
Side marker
lamps 2. Working conditions
- The functioning depends on the key position in
the key cylinder (OFF, ACC, RUN or START)
- When the key goes in RUN or START position
LTKG146I while the room lamps are decaying, then the
room lamps are turned off immediately.
ESCORT FUNCTION
- When the Ignition key position is RUN or START
1. If the head lamps low beam are turned on by head and the last door is closed then the room lamps
lamps low beam switch or by auto light switch when are OFF.
the Ignition switch is turned from the ON to ACC or - If the room lamps have been activated using the
OFF positions. RKE UNLOCK function, and the ignition switch is
turned to the RUN or START position, the room
2. The head lamps low beam are turned off: lamps will be immediately turned OFF..
- 30s after the driver door is closed - If the Ignition sw status is in RUN or START and
- When the multifunction switch is not in postion Unlock information occurs, then the room lamp
headlamps turned on or autolight status is not changed.
- 20 mn after the driver door is open - When the system enters to ARM WAIT mode by
- 20mn after IGN leaves the positions RUN to ACC Remote Key or Mechanical cylinder lock switches
or OFF the Room lamp should be turned off immediately.
- If IPM receives RKE "LOCK" command two times - If there is RKE Lock signal at any door open,
all doors should be locked first and wait for the
3. Escort function enables only "Head Lamp Low Beam", all door close. No action is taken while the
so Park/Tail lamp should be turned off when driver Open Door status is OPEN and the doors are
door is opened at key out (Battery Saver function). locked. Then when Open Door status changes
from OPEN to CLOSE, Room lamps will be OFF
4. Functional Diagram immediately.
- The 30sec timer does not depend on the key re-
minder status.
- If the main switch is changed to ON from DOOR
after 20minute lamp OFF, all the lamps are turned
Park Lamps ON.
Park/Tail Head lamp
Light MF Lamp Sw FAM
Low Beam - If the Open Door status changes from OPEN to
switch Head lamp Low
Beam Sw
CLOSE (all doors close) when ignition switch is
Autolight IPM on RUN position, room lamps and door courtesy
Sw lamps should turn off immediately (Do not decay
Tail Lamps
off).
RAM

LTKG146J
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -57

- After 20minute Room Lamp OFF at door open,


Room lamps are turned ON again when:
• One of the door open switch’s status
changes. (Open to Close or Close to Open)
• Ignition key is in RUN or START Position.
• Receiving an UNLOCK event while a door is
open and Main Room Lamp Switch is in the
DOOR position.

- For the room lamps, when the 20m timer is run-


ning and any of the side doors is opened the timer
is restarted.

3. Functional Diagram

Main Room Lamp Sw


IPM ON
ON
Door
Off

MA4A
0.5
Main

Center Room Lamp


Door Off
10W ON

Rear Room Lamp


Door Off
RAM 10W ON

Luggage Lamp
Tail Gate

Door Off
10W

LTKG146K
BE -58 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

4. Truth table

Open Door Luggage Room Room Room Lamp Room Lamp Room Lamp
Main Room Switch Switch Switch
status interior Lamps LS Lamps LS
Lamp sw
(RAM) Lamp (CAN) (Door) (On) ON DOOR OFF
OFF Don’t care Don’t care OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON Don’t care Don’t care OFF ON ON ON ON
ON during
OFF ON during
OPEN 20 min then OFF
(*) 20 min
directly OFF
ON during
OPEN →LOCK 20 min then OFF
ON during
(**) 20 min
directly OFF
ON during
OPEN →UNLOCK 20 min then OFF
ON during
(***) 20 min
directly OFF
CLOSE OFF OFF OFF OFF
DOOR ON OFF
OPEN → Don’t care
Decayed
OFF
Decayed
CLOSE OFF OFF
ON during
OPEN → Don’t care 20 min then OFF
ON during
CLOSE 20 min
directly OFF
CLOSE →LOCK OFF OFF OFF
ON during
ON during
CLOSE →UNLOCK 30 min then OFF
30 min
directly OFF

(*) : OFF is transmitted when there is no action from MAP LAMP


Lock/Unlock. It has no impact on the 20mn timer (no
restart). 1. The map lamps may be controlled manually or by the
(**) : LOCK transition is sent by IPM only when door Rear Area Module (RAM).
status is CLOSE. Thus there is no action on the 20mn
timer in this case. 2. Functional Diagram
(***) : When transition to UNLOCK is received, 20mn
timer is restarted.

Map Lamp
LH

IPM RH

RAM

LTKG146L
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -59

3. Truth table

Main Room Open Door status Luggage interior Map Lamp Switch Map Lamp Switch
Map Lamp LS
Lamp sw (RAM) Lamp (CAN) ON OFF
OFF Don’t care Don’t care OFF ON OFF
ON Don’t care Don’t care ON ON ON
OFF ON during 20 min
OPEN ON ON during 20 min
(*) then directly OFF

OPEN → LOCK ON during 20 min


ON ON during 20 min
(**) then directly OFF

OPEN → UNLOCK ON during 20 min


ON ON during 20 min
(***) then directly OFF

DOOR CLOSE OFF OFF ON OFF


CLOSE → LOCK OFF ON OFF
ON during 30 min
CLOSE →UNLOCK then directly OFF
ON ON during 30 min

OPEN → CLOSE Don’t care OFf (DECAY) ON OFf (DECAY)


ON during 20 min
CLOSE → OPEN Don’t care
then directly OFF
ON ON during 20 min

(*) : OFF is transmitted when there is no action from LUGGAGE LAMP


Lock/Unlock. It has no impact on the 20mn timer (no
restart). 1. Working Conditions
(**) : LOCK transition is sent by IPM only when door - The 20min timer does not depend on the key re-
status is CLOSE. Thus there is no action on the 20mn minder status.
timer in this case. - After 20minute Luggage Lamp OFF at tailgate
(***) : When transition to UNLOCK is received, 20mn open, luggage lamps are turned ON again when:
timer is restarted. • Tailgate close and then tailgate is opened
again
• Ignition key is in RUN or START position.
BE -60 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. Truth table

Luggage Lamp Luggage Lamp


Tail Gate status Switch Switch
Main Room Lamp sw Luggage Lamp LS
(RAM)
DOOR OFF
OPEN ON ON OFF
OFF
CLOSE OFF OFF OFF
ON Don’t care OFF ON ON
ON during 20 min
OPEN ON during 20 min
then directly OFF
CLOSE OFF OFF
DOOR OFF
OPEN → CLOSE OFF OFF
ON during 20 min
CLOSE → OPEN then directly OFF
ON during 20 min

DOOR COURTESY LAMPS

1. Working Conditions
- When driver or assistant door is open the asso- Driver Door Open SW
ciated door courtesy lamp is turned ON immedi- DDM
Passenger Door Open SW
ately.
- When driver door is closed the door courtesy
RAM
lamp is decaying during 5±0.5 seconds with a
resolution of more than 32 steps. The ADM and Key Reminder SW
DDM modules manage this decay. IPM ADM
- If ignition key goes to RUN or START position dur-
ing decaying, the RAM module sends CAN vari-
able with OFF value to ADM(DDM) module and
the assist courtesy lamp (Driver courtesy lamp)
is turned off immediately.
LTKG146M
- If the status of driver door (assist door) changes
from OPEN to CLOSE when ignition switch is
RUN position, Driver courtesy lamp should turn
off immediately.
- If ignition switch is OFF or ACC and the driver
door is open, there is a timer of 20 min after which
the driver courtesy lamp is turned OFF.

2. Functional Diagram
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -61

3. Truth table

Driver or Assist Key Reminder LU Interior Lp DD Courtesy Lp


Ignition Sw Comment
Door status Sw Sts Ctrl (CAN) Ctrl (CAN)
OFF DECAY
OPEN → CLOSE OFF, ACC - -
(5.5s)

OPEN → CLOSE RUN, START - - OFF


Timer 20 min is
OPEN OFF, ACC - OFF ON (20mm)
started.
OPEN OFF, ACC - → LOCK ON (20mm)

OPEN OFF, ACC - → UNLOCK ON (20mm)


Decaying state is
CLOSE - - → LOCK OFF
stopped by a lock

KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION PANEL LIGHTS, SWITCH ILLUMINATION

1. Working Conditions 1. Working Conditions


The key cylinder is illuminated when the driver and / The MF "high beam" and "flash to pass" switches do
or the assist door are open. not influence the management of the Panel Lights and
Trip Computer illumination, Rear Blower illumination
2. Key hole extinguish conditions: and Rear Monitor illumination.
- The key cylinder is turned off 10s after the driver
and assist doors are closed. 2. Functional Diagram
- The key cylinder is turned off immediately if the
key is inserted in the hole and put to RUN or
START position.
Panel lights/Trip
- For vehicles equipped with BurglarAlarm, the key computer
cylinder is turned off immediately when the sys-
tem goes to ARM WAIT mode during the 10s after Park/Tail Lamp Sw
the driver and assist doors are closed. Rear Blower/Rear
- For vehicles not equipped with BurglarAlarm, the Head Lamp Low Monitor Illumination
Beam Sw IPM RAM
key cylinder is turned off immediately when RKE
Auto Head Lamp Sw
lock signal is received from keyfob during the 10s
after the driver and assist doors are closed (4).

3. Functional Diagram

LTKG146O

DIMMABLE BACKLIGHTING

Driver Door Open Sw 1. Working Conditions


IgnKeyHole
Illumination The Dimmable backlighting is directly managed by the
Passenger Door RAM IPM
Open Sw rheostat.

LTKG146N
BE -62 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SEAT SWITCH ILLUMINATION REAR WIPER AND WASHER

1. Working Conditions 1. Rear wiper working conditions


The IPM sends a CAN message to the DDM so that - The rear wiper is available in RUN state.
this module illuminate the power seat switches. - In the START state, all the wiper and washer out-
puts are halted and then activated again.
2. Functional Diagram - In the OFF and ACC states, the rear wiper stops
its movement at current position. The rear wiper
will move to the park position at the next IGN ON.
In these states, the rear washer is not activated.

Park/Tail Lamp Sw 2. Rear washer working condition


- If the washer signal is active less than 60ms, the
Head Lamp Low
Beam Sw IPM DDM signal is neglected.
- If the washer signal is active for T1 (between
Auto Head Lamp Sw
60ms and 300ms), the rear wiper output is turned
on for T2 (2.5~3.8 sec.), T3 (300ms) after the
washer has been turned ON.
Rear washer activated for T1 : [60ms;300ms]

LTKG146P

VIEW ENHANCEMENT FUNCTION OFF


60ms<T1<300ms.
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER WASHER ON
SW OFF

1. Front wiper working conditions


These functions are active when Ign2 switch ON
In the OFF and ACC states, the front wiper is not WIPER ON T3 T2

activated. If IGN2 turns OFF during wiper operation, OUTPUT OFF

the wiper stops at the current position and will move


to the park position on the next IGN2 ON. In these
states, the front washer is not active.

2. Front washer working condition


LTKG147Z
The front washer functionality is directly available to
the driver. It consists in activating the front washer
pump, which is located under hood. As long as the T1 : 0.06 ~ 0.3 sec.
driver activates the washer multifunction switch, the T2 : 2.5~3.8sec.
front washer is active. T3 : 0.3 sec.

3. Functional diagram 3. Functional diagram

Ignition switch status

Front Wiper Int Sw IG2 Ignition switch status


Front Wiper Mist Sw
Multi Front washer Sw
Function Rear washer Sw Rear washer
Switches Front wiper Front
Front intermittent level input low speed and
(MF) Rear washer Sw FAM Front washer rear
Front wiper high speed Sw Front wiper washer
Front wiper low speed Sw high speed Multi Rear wiper low
Rain speed Sw
Function
Int level signal sensor Switches Rear intermittent IPM
Front wiper on/off wiper Sw
IPM (MF)
Front Front wiper low/high
wiper Rear wiper motor
Front wiper park Sw
RAM Rear wiper park sw Rear
FAM wiper

Front Front washer


and
rear Rear washer
washer

LTKG146Q LTKG146R
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -63

DEFOG
RUN

This function controls the heating defog grids on wind- Ignition Sw


OFF, ACC, START
shield, rear glass, and rear view mirrors. Engine
ON
Running
OFF
1. Working Conditions Windshield
Defog Sw/
ON

The defog function can be activated only when engine Rear Defog
OFF
Sw
is running and ignition key is in RUN position. TG_Open
OPEN

- When windshield defog switch is pushed, wind- Sw Sts CLOSED

shield defog is activated for 20 minutes. Rear Defog


ON
30 sec
Ctrl
- While windshield defog is on, the windshield de- OFF

fog button is illuminated Windshield ON


Defog Ctrl
- If the switch is pushed again while defog is al- OFF

ready active, defog stops. Windshield ON


Defog Sw
- If the engine stops while defog is on, defog stops Indicator/
OFF
Rear Defog
and it is NOT automatically turned on when the SwIndicator
engine is started again
- Rear defog works exactly in the same way as LTKG146S

windshield defog using the rear defog switch but-


ton as input. 3. Functional Diagram
- When rear defog is active, rear defog switch indi-
cator is ON. IgnSwSts Charg VoltageCtrl
- Rear defog ctrl output controls rear glass defog
WindshieldDefogSwIndicator
as well as rear view mirrors defog. Windshield Defog Sw
Rear Defog Sw WindshieldDefogTimer
FAM Windshield Defog On/
2. Rear defog pause Off Check
- When IPM receives Tailgate Flasher CAN mes-
IPM RearDefogTimer
sage, rear defog is inhibited for 30s
- The 20min rear defog timer is frozen during this RAM
pause. Rear Defog On/Off
- If the user turns on rear defog function while this Check
pause is going on, Rear defog ctrl is set to ON
ADM
only at the end of the pause.
- This pause has no impact on rear defog switch DDM
illumination.
- When IPM receives Tailgate open CAN message LTKG146T

transition to OPEN value, this 30 s rear defog


pause is also started, it works the same way as COMFORT FUNCTION
described above. POWER WINDOWS

1. The purpose of the power window function is to man-


age the driver and assist power window motors. This
function is entirely implemented in the DDM and ADM
(door modules) and DMS role for this function is lim-
ited to providing signals through the CAN bus.

POWER SEAT WITH MEMORY INTERFACE

This function manages the power seat and the associ-


ated memorized positions. This function is entirely imple-
mented in the IMS (seat module) and DMS role for this
function is limited to providing signals through the CAN
bus.
BE -64 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ADJUSTABLE PEDAL REVERSE DRIVE EXTERIOR SIDE MIRROR

ADJUSTABLE PEDAL WITH MEMORY This function is implemented by the DDM. This function
INTERFACE(IMS) turns the 2 external reverse mirrors down when gear box
in reverse position.
1. This function is implemented by the IMS. This func-
tion adjusts the pedal position when the pedal back- QUARTER GLASS OPEN/CLOSE
ward/forward switch is pressed.
1. Working Conditions
2. Functional Diagram This Function is available when Ignition key is in RUN
position and for 30sec after end of RUN.
- Quarter glasses can be controlled by switches
situated near driver or switches situated near rear
passengers seat (3rd row of seats).
InhibitSwSts(CAN) - When the switch is pressed the motor output is
FAM
ON until the switch is released or after 5+/- 1sec.
The switch has to be released and pressed again
IG Sw
IPM IMS to command the motor output ON again.
Adjustable pedal Sw - If power window lock is activated only driver
window is enable by driver side switch and no
switches are enable to open quarter glass.
- There is no interaction with the sliding doors. It is
not forbidden to open the quarter glasses when
the sliding door on the same side is open.
- No switch information (driver or rear passenger )
LTKG146U prevails on the other. If the main switch and the
passenger side switch are pressed in opposite
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL(NON-IMS) direction at the same time, window stops moving.
1. Adjust Pedal allows to activate Adjustable Pedal fea-
2. Functional Diagram
ture for the non-IMS equipped vehicle, IPM needs to
control the power source (by relay coil control) of the
adjustable Pedal switch unit.
There is no Adjustable Pedal switch for Non-IMS ver-
sion.

2. Functional Diagram DDM Quarter Glass Motor Close

FAM
Quarter Glass Motor Open

IPM
VehicleSpeed(CAN) Quarter Glass Sw
Cluster
Adjustable pedal
On/Off signal Output

InhibitSwSts(CAN) IPM
FAM

LTKG146W
IG Sw

LTKG146V
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -65

OPEN FUEL FILLER DOOR POWER SLIDING DOOR & POWER TAILGATE

1. Functional Diagram 1. Description


There are two sliding doors and one tailgate in the
vehicle. A switch is fitted at each B-pillar to permit
Power Sliding Door activation.. For the tailgate, there
is also one push button switch. These switches are
used to send an signal of 200 ms minimum to the PSD
module (or PTG module).
Fuel Filler door
open solenoid 2. Functional Diagram
DDM RAM

PSD Open/ PSD Module


Close Sw
Open/
PTG Open/ Close
Close Sw PSD/PTG ON/ Start
OFF Sw Park/
PSD/PTG ON/
Neutral
OFF Sw
LTKG146X IPM RAM PTG Module
RKE signal
FAM PSD/PTG ON/ Park/
Neutral
SUN ROOF RELAY COIL IG Sw
OFF Sw
Start
PTG Flasher PTG Flasher Open/
Close
This function defines the condition for switching on or off Flasher
power feed to sun roof relay coil. This function is available
in RUN position and during after run timer ON.

POWER WINDOW TIMER


LTKG146Z

This function defines the conditions for allowing use of


power windows, quarter glass, and feed to sunroof relay EASY ACCESS
coil.
1. Description
SLIDING DOORS POWER WINDOWS The easy access function permits automatic rearward
movement of the driver seat when the key is removed
1. Working Conditions from the cylinder. Automatic forward movement of the
This function is available when ignition key is in RUN driver seat will take place when the key is inserted
position and for 30sec after end of RUN. Window op- into the cylinder. This function will be enabled on IMS
eration will be canceled if the driver or assist door is equipped vehicles when the AUTO button is pressed.
opened during the 30sec period after the key is turned Inhibit Switch should be in P-Position for the Easy Ac-
from RUN to ACC or OFF position.. cess operation.

2. Functional Diagram 2. Functional Diagram

ADM
Ignition Sw
DDM Sliding door
window up/down
Key reminder Sw
RAM IPM DDM
InhibitSwSts

IPM
IMS

Sliding door window switch

LTKG146Y LTKG147A
BE -66 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DRIVER INFORMATION GEARBOX STATUS

CLUSTER INDICATORS The status of the gearbox is sent on the CAN network
when the CAN network is available.
1. The instument cluster indicators listed below are con-
trolled by the In-Panel Module (IPM), Front Area Mod- OIL PRESSURE SWITCH STATUS
ule (FAM), or Rear Area Module (RAM) as applicable.
These indicators are: The status of the oil pressure switch is sent on the CAN
- Gearbox status network when the CAN network is available.
- Oil pressure
FUEL FILTER STATUS
- Sediment fuel filter
- Vacuum The FAM receives on digital input the status of the fuel
- Brake fluid filter (Fuel Filter Input) and sends it (Fuel filter switch) on
- Washer fluid the CAN network.
- Seat belt
- Park brake WASHER FLUID SENSOR STATUS
- Charging voltage
- Turn indicators The FAM receives on digital input the status of the washer
- High beam fluid sensor and sends it on the CAN network.
- Front fog If Washer Fluid Low Input is LOW for more than 10 sec,
- Doors open FAM sends the warning message.
- Tailgate open
SEAT BELT WARNING STATUS
- Stop lamp failure front and rear
The IPM receives on digital input the status of the seat
2. Functional Diagram belt switch and sends the seat belt warning on the CAN
network.
Inhibitor Sw "Reverse" Input
If the Ignition switch status is in RUN or START when the
Seat Belt Sw Input is FASTENED, the seat belt warning
Inhibitor Sw "Neutral" Input
indicator is blinking for 6 seconds.
Inhibitor Sw "Park" Input
When Seat Belt switch Input is NOT FASTENED, the seat
FAM
Oil Pressure Sw Input belt warning indicator is blinking for 6 seconds.
Fuel Filter Input If the Seat Belt switch Input is FASTENED during the 6
Washer Fluid Sensor Input seconds, the seat belt warning indicator is blinking till the
end of the 6 seconds.
Seat Belt Sw Input
Alternator "L" In North America:
Parking Braker Sw Input the seat belt warning indicator is blinking when Ignition
Brake Fluid Sensor Input switch is on the status RUN or START and Seat Belt Sw
Stop lamp fuse open check CLUSTER Input is NOT FASTENED.
Vacuum Sw Input FAM
IPM
ABS EBD Warning Input

Driver door open Sw Input

Sliding door open Sw Input RAM

Tailgate Open Sw Input Vehicle Speed

StopLpErrorCtrl
RAM

LTKG147B
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -67

PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR FRONT FOG LAMP STATUS

The indicator manages 3 functions: brake fluid sensor, The status of the front fog lamp (lightning and state of the
parking brake warning and vacuum switch. bulbs) is sent on the CAN network when the CAN network
The vacuum function is available for diesel engine only is available.

The FAM receives on digital input the status of the vacuum DOORS OPEN WARNING
switch and the ABS EBD warning and sends them on the
The RAM receives on digital input the status of the driver
CAN network.
door open switch and sends it on the CAN network.
The status of the vacuum switch and the ABS EBD warning
The RAM receives on digital input the status of the passen-
are sent on the CAN network when the CAN network is
ger door open switch and sends it on the CAN network.
available.
The RAM receives on digital input the status of the left
The FAM receives on digital input the status of the brake
sliding door open switch and sends it on the CAN network.
fluid sensor and sends it on the CAN network.
The RAM receives on digital input the status of the right
The status of the brake fluid sensor is sent on the CAN
sliding door open switch and sends it on the CAN network.
network when the CAN network is available.
The IPM receives on digital input the status of the parking
When vehicle speed is under 10 kph, with ignition key not
brake switch and by CAN network the status of the vacuum
inserted and any door OPEN, DoorsOpenWngCtrl stays
switch, the status of the ABS EBD warning, the status of
ON for 20 min and then is turned OFF.
the brake fluid sensor and the speed of the vehicle.
The IPM sends the park brake indicator control on the CAN TAILGATE OPEN SWITCH STATUS
network.
When vehicle speed is under 10 kph, ignition key is in-
The indicator is lighted if the vacuum switch or ABS EBD serted and Tailgate open switch is OPEN, Tailgate Open
warning are on or brake fluid sensor is low or park brake warning stays ON forever (IPM can enter sleep mode).
switch is on. When vehicle speed is under 10 kph, with ignition key not
If the speed of the vehicle is over 10 km/h and ignition inserted and lgate open switch is OPEN, Tailgate Open
switch is on the status RUN the park brake indicator con- warning stays ON for 20 min and then is turned OFF.
trol is blinking at 50% duty in 0.6 second if Parking Brake
switch Input is active. In this case Vacuum switch, ABS CHIME CONTROL
EBD warning and Brake Fluid sensor are ignored.
1. The chime warns the driver that a problem is occurred.
The park brake indicator is blinking on the same time that
These warning are:
the chime is ringing. If a CAN signal among Vacuum
- Seat belt
switch, EBD warning or Brake Fluid Sens switch is IN-
- Parking on
VALID, out of range or not received this CAN signal is con-
- Over speed
sidered to be OFF.
- Key reminder
If VehicleSpeed CAN signal is INVALID or not received, it
- Light Warning
is considered to be 0 kph.
- Doors Open
CHARGING VOLTAGE CONTROL - Tailgate open warning

The IPM receives on analog input the voltage of generator 2. Chime sound priority:
and sends a warning. - 1st : Seatbelt warning
When the voltage of generator L pass strictly above 10V, - 2nd : Overspeed warning
the state of the CAN variable. - 3rd : Door open warning
- 4th : T/Gate open warning
TURN INDICATORS STATUS - 5th : Key operated warning
- 6th : Parking Brake warning
The status of the turn indicators are sent on the CAN net-
- 7th : Light ON warning
work when the CAN network is available.
- 8th : Key learning sound
HIGH BEAM STATUS
3. If two different warning condition happen at the same
The status of the high beam is sent on the CAN network time, chime should work only for the highest warning
when the CAN network is available. condition.

4. Cluster indicators should work for two warning behav-


ior.
BE -68 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5. Behavior Description DOORS OPEN WARNING

The RAM receives on digital input the status of the driver /


passenger / left sliding / right sliding door open switch and
sends it on the CAn network.
Ignition Sw The IPM receives by CAN network the speed of the vehi-
Seat Belt Sw Input cle.
Parking Brake Sw Input The doors open warning chime is activated when one or
CLUSTER
Vehicle Speed several of the 4 doors is opened and the speed of vehicle
IPM
Tailgate Open Chime is over 10km/h.
Sw Input Key Remind signal
Driver Door Open Sw Input
Sw Input
TAILGATE OPEN WARNING
Sliding Door RAM
Open Sw Inpuy The RAM receives on digital input the status of the tailgate
open switch and sends it on the CAN network.
The IPM receives by CAN network the speed of the vehi-
cle.
LTKG147C The tailgate open warning chime is activated when the tail-
gate is opened and the speed of vehicle is over 10km/h.
SEAT BELT WARNING
SAFETY AND SECURITY FUNCTION
The IPM receives on digital input the status of the seat belt
switch. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The chime is activated during 6 second when the seat belt
1. The aim of this function is to receive the key fob signal
is not fastened.
and decode it. There are 8 different data included in
The chime will stop immediately if the seat belt is fastened
the radio frequency frame sent by the RKE to the IPM
during the 6 seconds of the chime.
module:
PARK BRAKE WARNING • Central door lock
• Central door unlock
The IPM receives on digital input the status of the parking • Panic function
brake switch. • Driver door window close (long press on RKE
The IPM receives the speed of the vehicle by the CAN lock button)
network. • Driver door window open (long press on RKE un-
The chime is activated when the parking brake is on, igni- lock button)
tion switch is on RUN and speed vehicle is over 10 km/h. • Left sliding door open/close
The park brake indicator is blinking at the same time that • Right sliding door open/close
the chime is ringing. • Power tailgate open/close

OVER SPEED WARNING 2. Each vehicle can have at most 2 associated key fobs.
The key fob is physically separated from the key itself
The IPM receives the overspeed warning by the CAN net- (separate device).
work.
The chime is actived when the overspeed speed warning 3. Input/Output Definition and Characteristics
is on the state Overspeed.

KEY REMINDER WARNING

The IPM receives the status of the key on digital input.


The IPM receives the status of the driver door open switch
Keyfob
by the CAN network. RF signal
The chime is activated when key is inserted and the driver IPM
door is open.

LIGHT WARNING

The IPM receives the status of the driver door open switch
by the CAN network.
The light chime warning is activated when the driver door
is open and the park and tail lamps are turned on. LTKG147E
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -69

CENTRAL LOCK/UNLOCK 2. Functional Diagram

1. Central locking/unlocking logic is controlled by IPM.


Locking/Unlocking inputs are located in ADM, DDM Driver Door Lock
(Lock/Unlock switch, door knobs, door key cylinder) Monitoring Sw
and in IPM (RKE receiver). Unlock
DDM M
Lock
2. Locking/Unlocking actuators are located in ADM for
passenger door, DDM for driver door and RAM for
sliding doors and tailgate. Assist Door Lock
Monitoring Sw
There are 5 ways of operating central lock/unlock: Key Reminder
Sw IPM Unlock
• With Key RKE ADM
M
• With Door Lock/Unlock switches located on Lock
ADM/DDM
Sliding Door
• With Door Lock Monitoring switches located on Tailgate Lock
the passenger/driver door Monitoring Sw
• With Door/Tailgate Key Cylinder Lock/Unlock RAM
switches located on the tailgate or passen- M M M
ger/driver door. Sliding Door
Tailgate Lock
3. Functional Diagram
LTKG147I
Driver Door
- Lock Monitoring Sw
- Key Unlock Sw
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY PANIC
Lock/Unlock
signal - Lock Sw
Unlock 1. Working Conditions
DDM M Driver Door RKE panic function is only active when the key is out
RKE
KeyFob receiver
Lock of key cylinder.
Assist Door Once started, panic operation is not stopped when ig-
- Lock Monitoring Sw
- Key Unlock Sw nition key is inserted, ignition is ACC, RUN or START,
- Lock Sw or door is opened or closed.
Key Reminder Sw
Crash Sensor Unlock
IPM ADM
M Assist Door 2. Functional Diagram
Lock

Lock/Unlock
Sliding Door, signal
Tailgate Lock
Monitoring Sw/
Open Sw,
Horn Relay Tailgate Key RKE
Drive Lock/Unlock Sw KeyFob receiver
RAM Sliding Door, Turn Indicator Ctrl FAM
Unlock Tailgate IPM
M M M Key Reminder Sw

Lock

LTKG147F Horn Relay Drive

KEY REMINDER UNLOCK Horn

1. Key reminder door unlock does not take into account


the lock/unlock commands from RKE, key cylinder or LTKG147K

door lock switches. It only takes into account the


state of the door lock monitoring switch, key reminder
switch and door open status in order to proceed with
the unlock sequence or not.
BE -70 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HORN • Door unlocking by RKE signal.


- Whenever this signal is received, door UN-
1. Working Conditions LOCK pulse is always issued.
Required key positions: - Hazard lamp flashes two times whenever the
• At any position of the key in the cylinder for the key fob unlock signal is received.
horn stalk activation, - This signal will make the system possible
• At Key out from the key cylinder for the horn lock to enter into the DISARM or 30sec DELAY
activation or for panic activation. state depending on Condition A is true or
not.
2. Functional Diagram
• LH or RH PSD open/close by RKE signal.
- Only with the information received by RKE,
the burglar alarm system cannot distinguish
the OPEN signal from CLOSE signal.
- RAM will pass this signal to LH PSD and RH
PSD then the burglar alarm state is decided
depending on the vehicle condition.
IPM Horn Relay
Hron Sw Drive Horn
• PTG open/close
- Only with the information received by RKE,
the burglar alarm system cannot distinguish
the OPEN signal from CLOSE signal.
- RAM will pass this signal to PTG module
then the burglar alarm state is decided de-
LTKG147L pending on the vehicle condition.

BURGLAR ALARM FUNCTION


• Panic by key fob
BURGLAR ALARM - Whenever this signal is received, the PANIC
function is activated (unless the system is
1. Basic Concept already in an ALARM state).
• The following functions are related to the RKE
and burglar alarm systems..
• Mechanical key on the driver door, assist door
- Door locking
and tail gate door
- Door unlocking
- It is possible to ARM or DISARM the system.
- PSD open/close (both for left and right)
- PTG open/close
- Panic 2. Functional Diagram

• If IGN key is inserted into the key cylinder, the


RKE transmitter functions are inoperative.. Siren
FAM
• Door locking by RKE signal:
- Whenever this signal is received, door LOCK
pulse is always issued.
- Hazard lamp flashes one time for 1 second
depending on the burglar alarm state.
Key Cylinder
- This signal will make the system possible to RAM
Lock

Unlock

enter into the ARM state (or PREARM state


depending on the vehicle condition).

Ign Sw MTS
S

Burglar Indicator
Inhibit Sw(P/N)
IPM
FAM
Hood Sw

LTKG147N
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -71

ARM MODE DISARM MODE

• If 30 second timer is elapsed without any changes • If RKE unlock signal is received, then UNLOCK output
from the ARM WAIT mode, then system goes to ARM is issued together with the flashing of hazard lamp
mode. (two times) and the system enters into the DISARM
• Whenever RKE lock signal is received in the ARM condition.
state, then the system makes a hazard flash (1 sec- • If mechanical key switch unlock signal is received,
ond) and sends a door lock pulse. then UNLOCK output is issued for 500ms and the sys-
tem enters into the DISARM condition.
PREARM MODE • When entering into DISARM from ALARM state, cur-
rent alarm will be cancelled and burglar alarm relay
• If the vehicle is locked using the RKE transmitter or
drive output is turned off.
the door lock cylinder, and one or more doors are in
• When RKE unlock signal is received again in the DIS-
an OPEN state, the system issues a LOCK pulse and
ARM state, UNLOCK output is issued again and haz-
enters a PREARM state." In the PREARM state, the
ard lamp is flashed also (two times).
hazard lamps do not flash".
• If all doors are closed in the PREARM state, the sys-
tem enters ARM WAIT mode, and the hazard lamps ALARM MODE
will flash once.
• During PREMARM state, if f key reminder switch is • If one or more of entrances are opened in the ARM or
ON & IGN 1 & IGN 2 are turned on in this state, the REARM state, then Burglar alarm relay drive output
system immediately goes to DISARM state is turned ON in order to inhibit the start condition, and
hazard lamp and siren are activated for once of 27
ARM WAIT MODE seconds duration.
• Siren output and hazard lamp should be synchronized
• The ARM WAIT mode is active for 30 seconds. If any to get the same output period.
entrance (hood, doors, tailgate) is opened, any lock • Even though all the doors are closed during alarm,
knob is moved to an UNLOCK state, or the ignition alarm continues to operate it for the remaining time.
switch is turned ON, the system will immediately en- • When there is a new attack (with one of the entrance
ter DISARM mode. The system will enter ARM state if is still open) in the vehicle after completing the alarm
none of the previously mention conditions occur dur- output, alarm should not be started again.
ing the 30-second ARM WAIT mode.

DOOR OPEN
STATE ARM ALARM
HOOD CLOSE
T/GATE
DOOR OPEN
LOCK
HOOD
RKE CLOSE
UNLOCK T/G
T1 T1 Burglar ON
DOOR ON alarm relay
LOCK OFF
OFF drive
OUTPUT T1
T2 T2 ON
SIREN
HAZARD ON OFF
LAMP 0.6s T2 T2 T2
OUTPUT OFF
HAZARD ON
LAMP
ARM_WAIT OUTPUT OFF
DISARM ARM_WAIT DISARM ARM_WAIT
STATE T2

LTKG147O LTKG147P

T1 : 0.5 sec T1 : 27 sec (-0, +3sec)


T2 : 1.0 ± 0.1 sec T2 : 0.5 ± 0.1 sec
BE -72 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AFTER ALARM STATE SAFE & RESCUE MODE

• If ALARM cycle is elapsed, the system goes into AF- The goal of those modes is to be able to cope with failures
TER ALARM state. that may happen on some of the most critical functionali-
• During this state, ties (for the driver security) of the system.
- Burglar alarm relay drive output maintains ON.
- Siren and hazard lamp output are stopped. SAFE MODE

• If another entry is opened during the AFTER ALARM The safe mode is entered in case of system problems such
state, the burglar alarm relay drive output remains as:
ON, but the siren will not be re-activated. • Incoherent inputs on monitored signals. In this case,
safe mode is the debouncing time before the inputs
REARM STATE are considered INVALID. Note that today, we have
no way to detect if the rain/light sensor is in working
• If all entrances are is closed during AFTER ALARM operation or not. It means that a driver action will be
state, the system goes into REARM state. required in case of failure of this sensor;
• Loss of the CAN frame containing the monitored sig-
BATTERY REMOVAL nal:
• Loss of the CAN network: CAN goes to BUS OFF
• If the battery is removed with the system in the ARM
state, safe mode is the time necessary for detecting
state, the system will be placed into the ARM state
the BUS OFF state.
upon battery reconnect.
• The ALARM state will be re-activated if the battery is
disconnected, then reconnected, with the system in In all cases, the action in safe mode is to maintain the
an ALARM state. previous state of the system (for lighting and wiping). The
• If the battery is disconnected and reconnected with list of monitored signals is the same as in rescue mode
the system in AFTER ALARM state, the alarm will be
re-activated. EXITING SAFE MODE
• The system will enter DISARM mode if the battery is
disconnected during the ALARM WAIT state. The software safe mode is exited and the module goes
back to the normal mode when:
PANIC • On IPM, hardware inputs return to a coherent state;
• The lost CAN signal comes back while timeout has
• If RKE PANIC signal is received, Siren output and not elapsed;
hazard lamp operate for 27 seconds and the system • The CAN network returns to a normal state without
return to the previous state as soon as the PANIC reaching BUS OFF state.
function finishes.
• The PANIC function will be stopped if any RKE signal Software safe mode is also exited when the software res-
is received during PANIC activation.. cue mode is entered (problem does not disappear).
• If Key reminder switch is ON during PANIC function is
operating, PANIC is stopped immediately. Hardware safe mode is exited and the module goes back
• If the system goes to ALARM mode during PANIC to normal mode if the internal problem disappears (watch-
function is operating, PANIC is stopped immediately dog is properly triggered again). If the problem stays, hard-
and then ALARM function should be activated. ware safe mode is exited to enter hardware rescue mode.
• During ALARM state;
If RKE PANIC signal is received, ALARM mode is RESCUE MODES
maintained and PANIC function should be ignored.
ALARM has higher priority than PANIC function. The rescue mode consists in activating some safety func-
• During AFTER_ALARM state; tions when IGN2 = ON:
If RKE PANIC signal is received, AFTR_ALARM • Switch on the low beams (FAM), park lamps (FAM),
mode is maintained and PANIC function should be tail lamps (RAM) and cluster backlighting (IPM);
activated. • Unlock of all the doors when the rescue mode is en-
tered with IGN2 = ON
• Front wipers do not need to be turned on by software
in rescue mode because wipers can be turned on by
manually setting the MF switch to low speed. The
FAM software must keep the same state as before
entering the rescue mode.
• When IGN2 = OFF, low beams, park/tail lamps and
cluster backlighting are turned off.
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -73

ENTERING RESCUE MODES TROUBLE DIAGNOSTICS WHEN USING


Rescue mode is entered when some important CAN sig- DIAGNOSIS TOOL E2DF2DAE
nal or hardware input are not available. Rescue mode is
entered when one of the following conditions is true: 1. The diagnosis tool supports quick diagnosis of sup-
IPM ported body electrical systems through input/output
• Timeout on CAN signal InhibitSwSts, to detect loss of monitoring. and actuation testing.
CAN connection with FAM.
2. To diagnose the BCM function, select the menu of
• Timeout on CAN signal StopLpErrorSts, to detect loss
model and body control module.
of CAN connection with RAM.
• MF Light Switch information is invalid: when the sig-
nals coming from MF Light Switch are not coherent
SEDONA 06-
for more than 2 s, CAN signal ParkTailHeadLpCtrl is
sent with INVALID value and rescue mode is entered.
• Front Wiper MF Switch information is invalid: when
the signals coming from Front Wiper MF Switch are
not coherent for more than 2 s, CAN signal FWiperC-
trl is sent with INVALID value and rescue mode is en-
tered.
• CAN is in Bus Off state

RAM
• Timeout on CAN signal InhibitSwSts, to detect loss of
CAN connection with FAM.
• Timeout on CAN signal ParkTailHeadLpCtrl or
BTKG311A
FWiperCtrl, to detect loss of CAN connection with
IPM. 3. Select the module menu to diagnose.
• ParkTailHeadLpCtrl = INVALID or unknown value
• FWiperCtrl = INVALID or unknown value
• CAN is in Bus Off state SEDONA 06-

FAM
• Timeout on CAN signal StopLpErrorSts, to detect loss
of CAN connection with RAM
• Timeout on CAN signal ParkTailHeadLpCtrl or
FWiperCtrl, to detect loss of CAN connection with
IPM
• ParkTailHeadLpCtrl = INVALID or unknown value
• FWiperCtrl = INVALID or unknown value
• CAN is in Bus Off state

For all CAN signals, timeout duration is 2.5 times signal


periodicity.
BTKG311B
BE -74 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

4. The CURRENT DATA function is used to monitor in-


put/output conditions.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG144D

6. Use the "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES" mode.


BTKG312K

SEDONA 06-

BTKG144E

LTKG144B

5. Use the ACTUATION TEST mode to force output de-


vices to operate for testing purposes.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG144C
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -75

INSPECTION E803AF7F 2. The IPM communicates with the diagnostic tester di-
rectly. But other units operate self diagnostic, in-
1. The body network system consists of several ECUs put/output monitoring and actuator operation via the
that communicates via a CAN bus. The diagnostic IPM using the CAN communication.
tester is not directly connected to the CAN bus, but
utilises a one-wire communication line (K-line) that
connects to a gateway in the IPM ECU.

ADM

Diagnosis
CLUSTER

IPM IMS CAN Network

FAM

RAM

DDM

LTKG144F
BE -76 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

INPUT MONITORING

IPM (IN-PANEL MODULE)

No. Input switch Unit


1 IPM Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
2 FAM Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
3 RAM Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
4 DDM Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
5 ADM Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
6 IMS Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
7 CLU Node Availability PRESENT/NOT PRESENT
8 IPM Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
9 FAM Node Failurey FAILURE/ O.K
10 RAM Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
11 DDM Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
12 ADM Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
13 IMS Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
14 CLU Node Failure FAILURE/ O.K
15 Auto Head lamp ON/OFF
16 Headlamp low beam ON/OFF
17 High beam ON/OFF
18 Rear fog lamp ON/OFF
19 Front fog lamp ON/OFF
20 Park tail lamp ON/OFF
21 Main room lamp ON/OFF
22 Main room lamp door ON/OFF
23 Left turn signal ON/OFF
24 Right turn signal ON/OFF
25 Front wiper low speed(from rain sensor) ON/OFF
26 Front wiper low speed switch(from multi function switch) ON/OFF
27 Front wiper high speed(from rain sensor) ON/OFF
28 Front wiper high speed switch(from multi function switch) ON/OFF
29 Rear wiper low speed switch ON/OFF
30 Rear wiper intermittent switch ON/OFF
31 Front wiper intermittent switch ON/OFF
32 Front washer ON/OFF
33 Rear washer ON/OFF
34 Windshield defog ON/OFF
35 Rear defog ON/OFF
36 Parking brake ON/OFF
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -77

No. Input switch Unit


37 Hazard switch ON/OFF
38 Seat-belt ON/OFF
39 VAS ON/OFF
40 Front wiper mist switch ON/OFF
41 Sunroof open(When operating) OPEN/CLOSED
42 PSD PTG on/off switch signal ON/OFF
43 Flash to pass ON/OFF
44 Ignition key reminder INSERTED/NOT INSERTED
45 LH PSD open/close(Over head console) ON/OFF
46 PTG open/close(Over head console) ON/OFF
47 RH PSD open/close(Over head console) ON/OFF
48 Crash sensor input from airbag unit ON/OFF
49 Adjustable pedal backward ON/OFF
50 Adjustable pedal forward ON/OFF
51 IGN1 ON/OFF
52 IGN2 ON/OFF
53 ACC ON/OFF
54 MTS unlock input ON/OFF
55 Hood Open switch OPEN/CLOSED

FAM (FRONT AREA MODULE)

No. Input switch Unit


1 Inhibitor Switch Neutral ON/OFF
2 Inhibitor Switch Park ON/OFF
3 Inhibitor Switch Reverse ON/OFF
4 Brake Fluid Sensor State OK/LOW
5 Washer Fluid Sensor State OK/LOW
6 Fuel Filter State OK/NG
7 Oil Pressure Switch State OK/LOW
8 Vacuum Switch State OK/LOW
9 IGN2 ON/OFF
10 Front Wiper Park Switch State Park/Out of park
11 Stop lamp fuse check input OK/NG
12 Windshield defog operation check OK/NG
BE -78 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

RAM (REAR AREA MODULE)

No. Input switch Unit


1 Tailgate Flasher Signal(From PTG) ON/OFF
2 Stop Lamp switch ON/OFF
3 PSD PTG Door Lock Monitoring Switch UNLOCKED/LOCKED
4 Passenger Door Open Switch ON/OFF
5 Driver Door Open Switch OPEN/CLOSE
6 Tailgate Door Open Switch OPEN/CLOSE
7 RSD Open Switch OPEN/CLOSE
8 LSD Open Switch OPEN/CLOSE
9 RSD Power Window Up Switch ON/OFF
10 RSD Power Window Down Switch ON/OFF
11 LSD Power Window Up Switch ON/OFF
12 LSD Power Window Down Switch ON/OFF
13 RQG Power Motor Close Switch ON/OFF
14 RQG Power Motor Open Switch ON/OFF
15 LQG Power Motor Close Switch ON/OFF
16 LQG Power Motor Open Switch ON/OFF
17 IGN2 ON/OFF
18 Rear Wiper Park Switch Park/Out of park
19 Rear defog operation check input ON/NG
20 Tailgate Key Cylinder Unlock Switch ON/OFF
21 Tailgate Key Cylinder Lock Switch ON/OFF
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -79

DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE)

No. Input switch Unit


1 Door Lock Monitoring Switch LOCK/UNLOCK
2 Door Lock Switch ON/OFF
3 Door Unlock Switch ON/OFF
4 Key Cylinder Door Lock Switch ON/OFF
5 Key Cylinder Door Unlock Switch ON/OFF
6 Fuel Filler Door Open Switch ON/OFF
7 Power Seat Slide Forward Switch ON/OFF
8 Power Seat Slide Backward Switch ON/OFF
9 Power Seat Front Height Up Switch ON/OFF
10 Power Seat Front Height Down Switch ON/OFF
11 Power Seat Rear Height Up Switch ON/OFF
12 Power Seat Rear Height Down Switch ON/OFF
13 Power Seat Recline Forward Switch ON/OFF
14 Power Seat Recline Backward Switch ON/OFF
15 IMS Auto Switch ON/OFF
16 IMS Mode 1 Switch ON/OFF
17 IMS Mode 2 Switch ON/OFF
18 IMS Set Switch ON/OFF
19 OSRVM side Select Switch RH/LH/OFF
20 OSRVM direction Select Switch RIGHT/LEFT/DOWN/UP/OFF
21 IGN 2 Switch ON/OFF
22 Window Lock Switch ON/OFF
23 Front Left Window Up Switch ON/OFF
24 Front Left Window Down Switch ON/OFF
25 Front Left Window Auto Switch ON/OFF
26 Front Right Window Up Switch ON/OFF
27 Front Right Window Down Switch ON/OFF
28 Left Sliding Door Window UP Switch ON/OFF
29 Left Sliding Door Window Down Switch ON/OFF
30 Right Sliding Door Window UP Switch ON/OFF
31 Right Sliding Door Window Down Switch ON/OFF
32 Left Quarter Glass Open Switch ON/OFF
33 Left Quarter Glass Close Switch ON/OFF
34 Right Quarter Glass Open Switch ON/OFF
35 Right Quarter Glass Close Switch ON/OFF
BE -80 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ADM (ASSIST DOOR MODULE)

No. Input switch Unit


1 Door Lock Monitoring Switch ON/OFF
2 Door Lock Switch ON/OFF
3 Door Unlock Switch ON/OFF
4 Key Cylinder Door Lock Switch ON/OFF
5 Key Cylinder Door Unlock Switch ON/OFF
6 IGN2 Switch ON/OFF
7 Front Right Window Up Switch ON/OFF
8 Front Right Window Down Switch ON/OFF

IMS MODULE

No. Input switch Unit


1 IGN2 Switch ON/OFF
2 Slide front manual switch ON/OFF
3 Slide rear manual switch ON/OFF
4 Slide front limit switch ON/OFF
5 Slide rear limit switch ON/OFF
6 Recline front manual switch ON/OFF
7 Recline rear manual switch ON/OFF
8 "P" position switch ON/OFF
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -81

INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE


CODES(DTC)

IPM DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


1 B1102 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW Vbat < 9 V
2 B1588 FR WIPER/WASHER MF SW
MF switch status is not coherent for more than 2s
3 B1589 RR WIPER/WASHER MF SW
4 B1590 LIGHT MF SW ERROR
MF switch status is not coherent for more than 2s
5 B1591 TURN SIGNAL MF SW ERROR
CAN BUS PHYSICAL BUS
6 B1602 Physical error indicated by network management
FAILURE

DDM COMM. LOST & BUS DDM is missing in system configuration information


7 B1605
FAILURE reported from network management

8 B1606 ADM COMM. LOST & BUS ADM is missing in system configuration information
FAILURE reported from network management

9 B1607 IMS COMM. LOST & BUS IMS is missing in system configuration information
FAILURE reported from network management

10 B1611 FAM COMM. LOST & BUS FAM is missing in system configuration information
FAILURE reported from network management

RAM COMM. LOST & BUS RAM is missing in system configuration information


11 B1612
FAILURE reported from network management

12 B1613 CLU COMM. LOST & BUS CLU is missing in system configuration information
FAILURE reported from network management
13 B1624 EEPROM FAILURE Failed attempt to read or write EEPROM
14 B1627 EEPROM CORRUPTION Data in EEPROM is not coherent
15 B1628 MODULE CONF. CONFLICT Hardware and software configuration are not coherent
16 B1646 S/W RESCUE MODE Module enters rescue mode
No VAS chip transition from busy to not busy for more
17 B1647 VAS ERROR
than 5 s after a VAS message command has been issued
BE -82 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FAM DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


1 B1624 EEPROM FAILURE Failed attempt to read or write EEPROM
2 B1627 EEPROM CORRUPTION Data in EEPROM is not coherent
3 B1646 S/W RESCUE MODE As soon as the module enters rescue mode
WINDSHIELD DEFOG
4 B2119 Windshield defog relay failure
RELAY FAIL
BRAKE CIRCUIT OPEN OR
5 B2521 Stop lamp fuse failure
FUSE FAIL
RIGHT T/SIGNAL LAMP
6 B2535 Right turn signal lamp circuit short to ground error
SHORT TO GND
7 B2537 RIGHT T/SIGNAL LAMP OPEN Right turn signal lamp circuit open error
LEFT T/SIGNAL LAMP SHORT
8 B2539 Left turn signal lamp circuit short to ground error
TO GND
9 B2541 LEFT T/SIGNAL LAMP OPEN Left turn signal lamp circuit open error
RIGHT H/LAMP HIGH SHORT
10 B2543 Right headlamp high circuit short to ground error
TO GND
11 B2545 RIGHT H/LAMP HIGH OPEN Right headlamp high circuit open error
LEFT H/LAMP HIGH SHORT
12 B2547 Left headlamp high circuit short to ground error
TO GND
13 B2549 LEFT H/LAMP HIGH OPEN Left headlamp high circuit open error
RIGHT H/LAMP LOW SHORT
14 B2551 Right headlamp low circuit short to ground error
TO GND
15 B2553 RIGHT H/LAMP LOW OPEN Right headlamp low circuit open error
LEFT H/LAMP LOW SHORT
16 B2555 Left headlamp low circuit short to ground error
TO GND
17 B2557 LEFT H/LAMP LOW OPEN Left headlamp low circuit open error
18 B2559 FR FOG LAMP SHORT TO GND Right front fog lamp circuit short to ground error
19 B2561 FR FOG LAMP OPEN Right front fog lamp circuit open error
20 B2563 FL FOG LAMP SHORT TO GND Left front fog lamp circuit short to ground error
21 B2565 FL FOG LAMP OPEN Left front fog lamp circuit open error
22 B2571 RIGHT P/LAMP SHORT TO GND Right parking lamp circuit short to ground error
23 B2573 RIGHT P/LAMP OPEN Right parking lamp circuit open error
24 B2575 LEFT P/LAMP SHORT TO GND Left parking lamp circuit short to ground error
25 B2577 LEFT P/LAMP OPEN Left parking lamp circuit open error
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -83

RAM DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


1 B1624 EEPROM FAILURE Failed attempt to read or write EEPROM
2 B1627 EEPROM CORRUPTION Data in EEPROM is not coherent
3 B1646 S/W RESCUE MODE As soon as the module enters rescue mode
4 B2115 REAR DEFOG RELAY FAIL Command active and check entry not active
Command active and park position does not
5 B2441 RR WIPER P. POS. DETECT FAIL
change during 5s
6 B2524 BRAKE LAMP OPEN Stop lamps open circuit error
RIGHT T/SIGNAL LAMP
7 B2535 Right turn signal lamp circuit short to ground error
SHORT TO GND
8 B2537 RIGHT T/SIGNAL LAMP OPEN Right turn signal lamp circuit open error
LEFT T/SIGNAL LAMP SHORT
9 B2539 Left turn signal lamp circuit short to ground error
TO GND
10 B2541 LEFT T/SIGNAL LAMP OPEN Left turn signal lamp circuit open error
RR TAIL MARKER LAMP Right tail license side marker lamp circuit
11 B2579
SHORT TO GND short to ground error
12 B2581 RR TAIL MARKER LAMP OPEN Right tail license side marker lamp circuit open error
RL TAIL MARKER LAMP Left tail license side marker lamp circuit
13 B2583
SHORT TO GND short to ground error
14 B2585 RL TAIL MARKER LAMP OPEN Left tail license side marker lamp circuit open error
Back up lamps for Back Up Warning System unit
15 B2587 BACK UP LAMP SHORT TO GND
circuit short to ground error
Back up lamps for Back Up Warning System
16 B2589 BACK UP LAMP OPEN
unit circuit open error
RR BLOWER SW ILLU.
17 B2598 Rear blower switch illumination circuit open
CIR. OPEN
RR BLOWER SW ILLU.
18 B2599 Rear blower switch illumination short to ground
SHORT TO GND
BE -84 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DDM DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


Left OSM horizontal motor
1 B1910 Right OSM horizontal motor circuit open error
or sensor error
Left OSM vertical motor or
2 B1911 Right OSM horizontal motor circuit open error
sensor error
3 B1952 OSRVM defogger error Left OSM deicer circuit open error
4 B2330 Driver door lock actuator error Assist door lock actuator circuit open error
5 B2331 Driver door unlock actuator error Assist door unlock actuator circuit open error
6 B2429 Folding motor power feed error Folding motor power feed circuit open error
Safety power window motor Safety power window IGN2 module power
7 B2455
power feed error circuit open error
8 B2525 Illumination error Illumination circuit open error
9 B2529 Drive door courtesy lamp error Driver door courtesy lamp circuit open error

ADM DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


Right OSM horizontal motor
1 B1912 Right OSM horizontal motor circuit open error
or sensor error
Right OSM vertical motor or
2 B1913 Right OSM horizontal motor circuit open error
sensor error
3 B1952 OSRVM defogger error Right OSM deicer circuit open error
4 B2332 Assist door lock actuator error Assist door lock actuator circuit open error
5 B2333 Assist door unlock actuator error Assist door unlock actuator circuit open error
6 B2525 Illumination error Illumination circuit open error
7 B2533 Assist door courtesy lamp error Assist door courtesy lamp circuit open error

IMS DTC LIST

No. DTC Code DTC Passiblecause


Lost Communication With Slide motor sensor
1 B1954 Slide motor or sensor error
output for more than 2 s
Lost Communication With Recline motor sensor
2 B1955 Recline motor or sensor error
output for more than 2 s
Lost Communication With Front right motor sensor
3 B1956 Front height motor or sensor error
output for more than 1 s
Lost Communication With Rear right motor sensor
4 B1957 Rear height motor or sensor error
output for more than 1 s
Lost Communication With Pedal motor sensor
5 B1958 Pedal motor or sensor error
output for more than 1 s
6 B2456 Seat motor sensor Vcc error Lost Seat motor sensor Vcc for more than 1 s
7 B2457 Pedal motor sensor Vcc error Lost Pedal motor sensor Vcc for more than 1 s
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -85

DRIVING ACTUATOR

IPM ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Windshield Defog Switch Indicator Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
2 Rear Defog Switch Indicator Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
3 Rear Fog Lamp Switch Indicator Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
4 VAS Switch Indicator Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
5 Back Up Signal Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
6 Micro Burglar Relay Drive Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
7 Ignition Key Hole Illumination ON/OFF Continuously ON
8 Adjustable Pedal On Off Signal Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
9 Power Feed To Sunroof Relay Coil ON/OFF Continuously ON
10 Horn Relay Drive ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF
11 Sound Mute Signal Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
12 Panel Lights Trip Computer Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
13 Micro MTS Burglar Alarm Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
14 Auto Light Sensor 5V Ref ON/OFF Continuously ON
15 Burglar Alarm Indicator ON/OFF Continuously ON
16 AV Tail Output ON/OFF Continuously ON
One Issue of voice alarm
17 VAS ON/OFF
message
Continuously ON with
18 Chime ON/OFF
0.6 sec period

FAM ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Front Washer ON/OFF 1 sec ON then OFF (once)
2 Rear Washer ON/OFF 2 sec ON then OFF (once)
3 Right Headlamp High ON/OFF Continuously ON
4 Right Headlamp Low ON/OFF Continuously ON
5 Right Lamp Park ON/OFF Continuously ON
6 Right Fog Lamp ON/OFF Continuously ON
Contiuously ON with (80 +/- 5)
7 Right Turn Signal ON/OFF
cycles per minute, Duty: 50%
8 Left Headlamp High ON/OFF Continuously ON
9 Left Headlamp Low ON/OFF Continuously ON
10 Left Lamp Park ON/OFF Continuously ON
11 Left Fog Lamp ON/OFF Continuously ON
Contiuously ON with (80 +/- 5)
12 Left Turn Signal ON/OFF
cycles per minute, Duty: 50%
13 IGN2 Control ON/OFF Continuously ON
BE -86 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

No. Description Value Control


14 Windshield Defog Timer ON/OFF Continuously ON
15 Wiper On Off ON/OFF Continuously ON
16 Wiper Low speed ON/OFF 3 wiping with LOW speed
17 Wiper High speed ON/OFF 3 wiping with HIGH speed
Contiuously ON with 60
18 Burglar Alarm horn ON/OFF
cycles per minute, Duty:50%

RAM ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Room Lamp LS ON/OFF Continuously ON
2 Room Lamp LS Door ON/OFF Continuously ON
3 Luggage Lamp LS ON/OFF Continuously ON
4 LQG Motor Close ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
5 LQG Motor Open ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
6 RQG Motor Close ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
7 RQG Motor Open ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
8 RSD Power Window Up ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
9 RSD Power Window Down ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
10 LSD Power Window Up ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
11 LSD Power Window Down ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
12 LH PSD Open Close Signal ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
13 RH PSD Open Close Signal ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
14 PTG Open Close Signal ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
15 PSD PTG On Off Signal ON/OFF Continuously ON
16 Park Signal ON/OFF Continuously ON
17 Start Signal ON/OFF Continuously ON
18 Rear Defog ON/OFF Continuously ON
19 Rear Fog Lamps ON/OFF Continuously ON
Contiuously ON with (80 +/- 5)
20 Right Turn Signal Lamp ON/OFF
cycles per minute, Duty: 50%
Contiuously ON with (80 +/- 5)
21 Left Turn Signal Lamp ON/OFF
cycles per minute, Duty: 50%
22 Back Up Lamp Back Up Warning System Unit ON/OFF Continuously ON
23 Left/Right Tail Licence Side Marker ON/OFF Continuously ON
24 Door Lock ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
25 Door Unlock ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
26 Rear Wiper Motor ON/OFF 5 sec ON then OFF (once)
Rear Blower Switch &amp;amp;amp;amp;amp;
27 ON/OFF Continuously ON
Rear Monitor illumination
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -87

No. Description Value Control


28 Fuel Filler Door Solenoid ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
29 Map Lamp LS ON/OFF Continuously ON

DDM ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Door Courtesy Lamp ON/OFF Continuously ON
2 Door Lock Out ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
3 Door Unlock Out ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
4 OSRVM Up ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
5 OSRVM Down ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
6 OSRVM Left ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
7 OSRVM Right ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
8 OSRVM Defog ON/OFF Continuously ON
9 Folding Motor Power Feed ON/OFF Continuously ON
10 Safety Power Window Auto Up Out ON/OFF 0.2 sec ON then OFF (once)
11 Safety Power Window Up Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
12 Safety Power Window Auto Down Out ON/OFF 0.2 sec ON then OFF (once)
13 Safety Power Window Down Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
14 Power Window up Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
15 Power Window Down Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
16 Illumination Out ON/OFF Continuously ON

ADM ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Door Courtesy Lamp ON/OFF Continuously ON
2 Door Lock Out ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
3 Door Unlock Out ON/OFF 0.5 sec ON then OFF (once)
4 OSRVM Up ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
5 OSRVM Down ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
6 OSRVM Left ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
7 OSRVM Right ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
8 OSRVM Defog ON/OFF Continuously ON
9 Power Window up Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
10 Power Window Down Out ON/OFF 3 sec ON then OFF (once)
11 Illumination Out ON/OFF Continuously ON
BE -88 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

IMS ACTUATOR LIST

No. Description Value Control


1 Power Seat Slide Forward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
2 Power Seat Slide Backward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
3 Power Seat FR Height Up Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
4 Power Seat FR Height Down Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
5 Power Seat RR Height Up Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
6 Power Seat RR Height Down Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
7 Power Seat Recline Forward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
8 Power Seat Recline Backward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
9 Pedal Forward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
10 Pedal Backward Motor ON/OFF Continuously ON
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BE -89

REPLACEMENT E3651272 3. Remove the keyless antenna cable and IPM(Instru-


ment Panel Module)(A) after loosening 3 nuts and dis-
IPM (IN-PANEL MODULE) connecting 5 connectors.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A).


(Refer to the Body group - crash pad)

[LHD] A

ATKF140B

A 4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF140A

[RHD]

LTKG140B
BE -90 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FAM (FRONT AREA MODULE) RAM (REAR AREA MODULE)

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the FAM cover from the engine room. 2. Remove the left luggage side trim
(Refer to the Body group - interior trim)
3. Remove the 2 FAM connectors(A) and battery termi-
nal nut(B). 3. Remove the RAM(A) after loosening the 7 connectors
and the 3 RAM mounting bolts(A).
A

B A

ATKF140C

ATKF140F
4. Remove the IPM(B) from the splesh shield(C) after
loosening the 3 IPM mounting bolts(A) and the IPM 4. Installation is the reverse of removal.
mounting clip.

C
A

ATKF140D

5. Disconnect the connector from the splesh shield.

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.


IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY SYSTEM) BE -91

IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY


SYSTEM)
IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY
SYSTEM)

REPLACEMENT E35FF8AE

1. Remove the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the seats in the car. (Refer to the Body group


- front seats)

ATKF423A

3. Remove the IMS module (A) after loosening 4 nuts


and 3 connectors in the bottom of seat.

ATKF151A

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -92 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

IMS POWER SEAT CONTROL

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM E11C2E1C

ADM

Diagnosis
CLUSTER

IPM IMS CAN Network

FAM

RAM

DDM

LTKG144F
IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY SYSTEM) BE -93

DESCRIPTION ED3E2C07 OPERATION ED87AABB

An optimal seat position set by a driver can be memorized MANUAL OPERATION


in P/seat unit by memory SW and position SW, which en-
ables restoration of seat position set by the driver despite Manual operation of the driver seat and adjustable pedals
seat adjustments. is possible provided the transaxle is in ’P’ range and the
Furthermore, data is transmitted between P/seat and IPM, vehicle speed is 0 MPH. Operation of the manual controls
DDM, ADM, RAM, FAM, CLUSTER through CAN BUS. overrides any automatic operation commanded via CAN.
Seat position presets cannot be recalled while driving. An MEMORY OPERATION
emergency stop function is provided; additional functions
are described below. 1. Pressing the ’M’ button on the control panel will place
the system into memory storage mode and will result
1. It conducts manual operation of seat by CAN BUS in a single pulse from the output buzzer.
data transmitted by DDM as well as that of adjustable
pedal by CAN BUS data transmitted by IPM received 2. If one of the memory location buttons is pressed and
when operating SW manually. held within 5 seconds of pressing the ’M’ button, the
output buzzer will pulse twice to indicate successful
2. Manual SW behavior when communication stops storage of seat, mirror, and adjustable pedal posi-
(back-up behavior) tions.
- Slide front/rear
- Recline front/rear 3. The ignition switch must be in the RUN or START po-
- Position control of slide motor is possible by man- sition, the vehicle speed must be 0 MPH, and the
ual SW even in case of congestion in CPU or re- transaxle must be in ’P’ range to store memory pre-
moval of a fuse for P/seat unit B. sets.

3. 2 memory locations are provided for storing seat, out- 4. Pressing the ’M’ button while recalling a stored preset
side mirror, and adjustable pedal presets. will halt the preset recall operation.

4. The driver seat can be set to slide rearward when the 5. Memory will be cleared if battery is removed.
ignition key is removed, and forward when the key is
inserted. MEMORY REPLAY OPERATION

5. 2 additional presets for seat, mirror, and adjustable 1. Pressing one of the memory location buttons will re-
pedal position can be stored with the RKE transmitter. sult in the driver seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
pedals being positioned based on the stored preset
data.

2. The ignition switch must be in the RUN position, the


transaxle must be in ’P’ range, the vehicle speed must
be 0 MPH, and the manual functions must not be in
operation to recall stored presets.

3. Others
- Play operation not recorded in the position switch
will not be conducted and there will be no buzzer
output.
- If other data is received during preset recall op-
eration, the most recent preset recall signal will
take precedence.
- If engine is started during preset recall operation,
halt preset recall operation, and resume it toward
target position 100ms after Ignition switch is re-
turned to "RUN". However, if the START state
lasts over 5 sec., it will not resume even after re-
turning to RUN.
BE -94 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

- If preset recall order is received during engine EASY ACCESS FUNCTION OPERATION (SLIDE
start, preset recall operation is inhibited. MOTOR ONLY)
- If input from manual switch for seat and adjust
pedal occurs during preset recall operation of 1. Easy access function operation is allowed only when
seat and adjust pedal, halt all their preset recall auto switch is on, and the operation will be halted if
operations. auto switch changes from on to off.
- If an error occurs during manual operation of seat
and adjust pedal, delete Memory. 2. If a key is removed and CAN BUS data transmitted
from IPM changes from "on" to "off", the seat slide will
4. Operation control move 50mm backward based on the IGN off point. If a
- Prioritization of operations key off position is farther back than 50mm against the
Motor starting is delayed for 100ms respectively IGN off point, get-off gearing will not be conducted. If
in case of auto control to prevent rush current slide rear limit becomes off in the middle of backward
from overlap when motors are running, and it fol- operation, retreat control will be halted.
lows the following order.
Slide > recline > front height > rear height > 3. The following conditions will be identified and pro-
adjust pedal cessed by IMS, and if any one of the following con-
- Memory preset recall is conducted in the follow- ditions is met, Easy access function operation will be
ing order, and delay time for each motor is as fol- prevented or halted.
lows. - When "P" position switch is not on.
- When Vehicle Speed in CAN BUS data transmit-
ted from cluster is "3km/h" or faster.
Slide relay
ON - When seat and pedal is under manual switch op-
OFF eration.
Recline ON
T1 - When auto switch is off.
relay OFF

Front height ON T1
4. When control is halted in the middle of backward oper-
relay OFF ation, the remaining operation will not be completed,
Rear height ON
and when returning, it will return just as much as it re-
T1
relay OFF treated.

Adjust pedal ON
T1 5. It will move to IGN off point in case of Get-on gearing
relay OFF
by key in despite manual switch input during or after
backward operation.
LTKG152A
6. After the key is removed, on the condition of SLEEP
T1 : Manimum 0.1 sec. state, Easy access function operation will be con-
Continuous cooperation TIMER value for each ducted after 150ms if the key is inserted when auto
motor switch is turned ON(OFF) from Off(ON).
Slide: 15 sec., recline: 30 sec., front height: 5
sec., rear height: 8 sec., adjust pedal: 10 sec.
- Control when turning to the opposite direction
ON
When motor has to be run in a reverse direction IGN1
OFF
during Easy access function or preset recall op- AUTO ON
eration, stop the operation immediately, wait for SWITCH OFF
100ms and then try operation to the reverse di- KEY IN ON
OFF
rection.
- If the difference between position and the current MANUAL ON
SWITCH OFF
one is below specified value, motor will not run CANCEL
even though preset recall data is received. SLIDE REVERSE

Slide, recline, front height, rear height : 6PULSE MOTOR STOP

Adjust pedal: 3LSB(about 0.06V) PROGRESS

- Operation will stop upon reaching Motor’s target


point when conducting Easy access function or
preset recall operation. LTKG152B
IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY SYSTEM) BE -95

MEMORY STORAGE OPERATION BY KEYLESS - When seat and pedal is manipulated by CAN
BUS and manual switch.
1. If "ID1" or "ID2" is received during keyless lock oper-
ation, record seat and pedal position in keyless code. SETTING LIMIT
(there is no buzzer output during memory storage op-
eration by keyless) 1. A limit switch is installed to prevent the seat from trav-
eling beyond the maximum forward/reward positions.
2. Memory storage operation is allowed for a single ID
after a change of IG from "on" →"off". 2. No limit switch is installed for the recline, height, or
pedal adjustments. Arbitrary limit positions are used
3. Any one of the following conditions will prevent key- for these functions.
less Memory storage operation.
- When "P" position switch is not on. DETECTING ERRORS FOR SEAT
- When Vehicle Speed in CAN BUS data transmit-
ted from CLUSTER is "3km/h" or faster. Take countermeasure against error if the following condi-
- When seat and pedal is manipulated by CAN tions occur during manual switch operation.
BUS and manual switch. - Error when pulse is not fed.
- When IG transmitted from IPM is other than off.
Front Rear
Slide Recline
PRESET RECALL OPERATION BY KEYLESS height height

1. When IG is off (CAN BUS data IG transmitted from Error Below 6 pulses Below 6 pulses
IPM is "off") and a key is removed (CAN BUS data Key condition in 2 sec. in 1 sec.
Reminder Switch transmitted from IPM is "off"), and if FR/RR
Prereq-
"ID1" or "ID2" is received during keyless unlock oper- limit SW Limit setting complete
uisite
ation, it automatically adjusts seat and pedal positions on
as memorized in keyless code (there is no buzzer out-
put during preset recall operation by keyless). How-
ever, seat slide adjustment position is determined as • Stop the related motor(seat / pedal) if an error is
follows, depending on Auto switch. detected during playing or Easy access function
- When auto switch is on ("IMS Auto Switch" is operation.
"on") , the position is automatically adjusted to • Stop the corresponding motor if an error is de-
50 mm farther back than target position, and if a tected during manual operation (excluding slide
key is inserted ("Key Reminder Switch" changes motor).
from "off" to "on"), it conducts Get-on gearing op-
eration to a target preset recall position. - If seat sensor Vcc below 1V is detected by 1s
- If auto switch is off ("IMS Auto Switch" is "off"), it • Stop all seat motors running if seat sensor Vcc
moves to the target memory play position. error is detected during playing or Easy access
function operation. (no buzzer output)
2. Any one of the following conditions will prevent preset
recall operation. - Return if seat sensor Vcc is 4V or more.
- When "P" position switch is not on.
- When Vehicle Speed in CAN BUS data transmit- DETECTING ERRORS FOR ADJUST PEDAL
ted from cluster is "3km/h" or faster.
- When seat and pedal is manipulated by CAN 1. If signal change is below 0.06V per sec though motor
BUS and manual switch. is running.
- When IG Switch transmitted from IPM is other - Stop the corresponding motor if error is detected
than off. during playing or Easy access function operation.
- When a key is inserted.
2. If adjust pedal sensor Vcc below 1V is detected by 1s
3. Playing will be halted during preset recall operation if - Stop pedal motor running if pedal sensor Vcc
any of the following conditions is met. error is detected during playing or Easy access
- When "P" position switch is not on. function operation. (no buzzer output)
- When vehicle speed in CAN BUS data transmit-
ted from cluster is "3km/h" or faster. 3. Return if adjust pedal sensor Vcc is 4V or more.
BE -96 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HANDLING ERRORS

1. If errors are discovered, regard them as harness dis-


connection or sensor failure, and conduct the follow-
ing measures.
- Stop auto control (play or Easy access function
operation) if it is under auto control and set off
buzzer 10 times (however, have motors other
than the one with an error operate normally).
- Set off alarm again in case of recurrence of error
after restoration of a motor with an error.
- Complete alarm 10 times though it comes back
to normal during error alarm.
- Stop alarm if receiving memory recall or play or-
der, and set off buzzer in the corresponding func-
tion.
- Manual operation control is allowed even for a
motor with errors.
- Set off buzzer if memory or play order is received
even during error.
- The timing to lift auto control suspension is when
repair for the failing motor is completed, and the
criteria for the completion point are as follows:
• Seat: if signal input is normal with over 6
pulses within a sec. from position sensor
of a motor with an error caused by manual
switch.
• Adjust pedal: if there is change in input of
over 3 LSB within 1 sec. from sensor by
manual switch.
IMS (INTEGRATED MEMORY SYSTEM) BE -97

IMS CONTROL SWITCH

REPLACEMENT EA96EEC5

1. Remove the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the front door trim panel in the car. (Refer to


the Body group - front door)

3. Remove the switch (A) mounting screws (3EA) after


disconnecting the 16pin switch connector.

ATKF154A

4. Remove the connector from the front door trim panel.

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -98 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FUEL FILLER DOOR


OPENER
COMPONENT LOCATION E69AFE27

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

1*

1. Fuel filler door open switch 2. Fuel filler door release actuator
BTKG180A
FUEL FILLER DOOR OPENER BE -99

FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE


ACTUATOR

INSPECTION E6F68BDA

1. Remove the rear seats. (Refer to the Body group -


rear seats)

2. Remove the luggage side trim. (Refer to the Body


group - interior trim)

3. Open the fuel filler door and disconnect the wiring


connector after loosening 2 bolts.

4. Check for continuity between terminal No. 1 and No.


2. If there is no continuity replace the fuel filler door
opener.

1
2

ATKF181A
BE -100 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FUEL FILLER DOOR OPEN 4. Select option "02. CURRENT DATA".


SWITCH
SEDONA 06-
INSPECTION E0C9CBEB

1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body


group - front door)

2. To check the Input Value of fuel filler door open switch,


select option "09.BODY CONTROL MODULE".

SEDONA 06-

BTKG182C

BTKG311A

3. Select option "DRIVER DOOR MODULE".

SEDONA 06-
LTKG182D

BTKG182B
FUEL FILLER DOOR OPENER BE -101

INSPECTION E0CB5735

1. Remove the front door trim panel.

2. Disconnect the switch connector (2P) from wiring.

3. Check the switch for continuity between the No. 1 and


No. 2 terminals. If the continuity is not as specified,
replace the switch.

1 2

ATKF182A
BE -102 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FUSES AND RELAYS


COMPONENT LOCATION E0AA3ECD

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

5
4*

2*

1. Front area module 4. ICM relay box


2. In-Panel module 5. Diesel box
3. Rear area module
BTKG200A
FUSES AND RELAYS BE -103

RELAY BOX (ENGINE


COMPARTMENT)

COMPONENTS E5DABED6

FAM (FRONT AREA MODULE)

< FRONT >

(DSL CONTROL)
IGN ECU ECU FRT/
FRT FUEL COIL #2 #1 STOP RR BCM-FC
BLOWER RAM #1 PUMP 20A 15A 10A LAMP WA-
40A 50A RELAY MAIN SP
IG2 20A SHER
RELAY 7.5A
RELAY 10A
IN-
02 02
* 132 143 154 5 6 187 198 209 21* 11
22
RR
JEC-
UP DN FUEL *
23
* * 29
BLOWER RAM #2 TOR
15A
10A 10A HEA- * * * 27 * * * 32 33
50A 34
30A FUEL
P/
TRA-
TER
20A
* * * 38 39 * * * 43 44
PUMP SP
IN
15A 10A
7.5A ABS #2 ATM ABS #1
20A 15A 40A
IG2
7.5A (ENGINE)
KEY FRT SP
IPM #3 RAM #3 SW #2 WIPER 15A
BCM-FE
50A 50A 30A 30A
STOP
KEY
SIG- 53 54 55 56 57 60
NAL
SW #1 * *
25A
IPM #2 IPM #1 FRT 7.5A
SP 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
50A 50A DE-
ICER
20A *
14 16 17 18
* 11 12 13
START
15A * * 20 * * 23 24 25 26
RELAY 27 28 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A/C * *
COMP
7.5A
* 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 * 51 52
HORN A/C COMP
RELAY SP
15A 25A
FUSE
PULLER

< REAR >

(ENGINE) (DSL CONTROL) (FLOOR)


BEC-FE BEC-FC BEC-FF
14 10 4 1
20 14 1
* *
35
* * * * * * * * * *
34 21 6 50 15 5
* * * *
7 2
* 46 37 29 24 * * *
* * * * * * 30 18 * 16 6
30
*
8
37 29 * * 2

* * 17 7

16 9
* 41 31 19 5
10
* 18 8
* 54
* * 23 18 11 3 * * * * * * *
19 13 11 9 3
* 43 33 21 7
*
56 48 14
39 24 12 * * * * *
32 25 19 13 4
*

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY

BTKG200B
BE -104 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CIRCUIT
FUSE (A) Circuit Protected
FRT/RR WASHER 10A FRONT WASHER MOTOR RELAY, REAR WASHER MOTOR RELAY
STOP LAMP 20A STOP LAMP SWITCH
KEY SW #1 25A IGNITION SWITCH
STOP SIGNAL 7.5A ABS CONTROL MODULE, ESP CONTROL MODULE, PCM, ECM, TCM
A/C COMP 7.5A A/C COMP RELAY
ATM 15A ATM RELAY
FRT DEICER 15A WINDSHIELD DEFOGGER RELAY
HORN 15A HORN RELAY
A/C COMP RELAY, PCM, MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR,
ECU #1 10A IMMOBILIZER MODULE, ECM, DIESEL BOX
O2 DN 10A OXYGEN SENSOR #3, OXYGEN SENSOR #4
PCM, VARIABLE INTAKE MANIFOLD VALVE,
ECU #2 10A
COOLING FAN RELAY, PCSV, OCV, ECM
O2 UP 10A OXYGEN SENSOR #1, OXYGEN SENSOR #2
IGN COIL 20A IGNITION COIL #1 ~ #6, CONDENSER #1, #2
INJECTOR #1 ~ #6, PCM, INLET METERING VALVE, EGR SOLENOID VALVE),
INJECTOR 15A
INTAKE THROTTLE SOLENOID VALVE, ECM, MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR, DIESEL BOX
P/TRAIN 7.5A MAIN RELAY, BURGLAR HORN RELAY, PCM, TCM, GENERATOR
FUEL PUMP 15A FUEL PUMP RELAY
ABS #1 40A ABS CONTROL MODULE, ESP CONTROL MODULE
ABS #2 20A ABS CONTROL MODULE, ESP CONTROL MODULE
FRT WIPER 30A FRONT WIPER ON RELAY
KEY SW #2 30A START RELAY, IGNITION SWITCH
FRT BLOWER 40A FRONT BLOWER RELAY
RR BLOWER 30A REAR BLOWER RELAY
IPM #1 50A INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE
IPM #2 50A INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE
IPM #3 50A INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE
RAM #1 50A REAR AREA MODULE
RAM #2 50A REAR AREA MODULE
RAM #3 50A REAR AREA MODULE
IG 2 7.5A AQS SENSOR
FUEL HEATER 20A FUEL FILTER HEATER

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY


BTKG200C

< DIESEL BOX >

COOLING
PTC FAN
AIR- RELAY #1 HIGH 10A PTC #1 GLOW PTC PTC GLOW
CON RELAY #2 RELAY #2 RELAY #2 RELAY #3 RELAY #1
RELAY GLOW #1
10A
CHECK

COOLING COOLING - -
C/FAN GLOW GLOW C/FAN
FAN HIGH FAN LOW PTC #1 AIRCON PTC #1 PTC #3
HI #2 #1 LOW
RELAY #1 RELAY GLOW #2 40A 20A 40A 40A
10A 30A 60A 60A 30A
CHECK

BTKG200J
FUSES AND RELAYS BE -105

INSPECTION EB8C68DE
[TYPE A]
FUSE
2 3
1. Be sure there is no play in the fuse holders, and that
the fuses are held securely.
1
2. Are the fuse capacities for each circuit correct?
2
3 4 1 4
3. Are there any blown fuses?
If a fuse is to be replaced, be sure to use a new fuse
of the same capacity. Always determine why the fuse
[TYPE B]
blew first and completely eliminate the problem before
installing a new fuse.
3 2 4
RELAY

1. Be sure that the relays are held the each module se-
curely. 1
2 5 1
2. Are the relay types for each circuit correct?
34 5

LTKG201F

[TYPE C]
E
E E
87 86
D
87

86 85
30 85
30

[TYPE D]
ATKF201A

85 30 87A
C

87
A
86 85 86 87
87A

30

LTKG201G

ATKF201B
BE -106 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT EAEB1424
[TYPE E]
FAM (FRONT AREA MODULE)
30 86
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the FAM cover of engine room.


85

30

3. Remove the FAM connectors (2EA) (A) and battery


87 85
87

86

terminal nut (1EA) (B).

[TYPE F] A

85 87A 87
87 87A 85

30

86 30 B
86

LTKG201H

[TYPE G]
ATKF140C

4. Remove FAM mounting bolts (3EA) (A) and remove


the FAM (B) from splash shield (C).
85 87 87A
87 87A 85

30

86 30
86

C
A

LTKG201I B

3. If system of some relay is not operate accurately, re-


place with a new one and check the system.

ATKF140D

5. Disconnect the connector from splash shield.

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.


FUSES AND RELAYS BE -107

RELAY BOX (PASSENGER


COMPARTMENT)

COMPONENTS E980B8AF

IPM (INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE)

< FRONT >


BCM-IF (FLOOR)

* * 3 * 5 6 7 8 9
19 20 21
10
* * 13 14 * 16 17 18

22
* * 25 * 27 28 29 30
42
* 32 * 34 * 36 * 38 39 * *

ACC AUDIO
7.5A SHUNT 15A
P/OUTLET OBD-II MEMORY
#2 15A 7.5A 7.5A
START ROOM VRS
7.5A 7.5A 10A
PEDAL IG2 #1
15A 7.5A
AIRBAG IND P/OUTLET ILLUMI
7.5A #1 15A 7.5A
ENG AMP IG2 #2
7.5A 25A 7.5A
IG1 ASS P/SEAT SEAT
7.5A 20A WARMER 20A
ABS DRV P/SEAT SUNROOF
7.5A 30A 25A
AIRBAG
15A ALTERNATOR
ADM DDM
30A 30A

BEC-IF (FLOOR)

54 53 52 51 49
* 55 40 39 * BCM-IM (MAIN)
47 46 45
* 43 41 38 37 36 35
* * 29 27
* 33 * 31 30
24
28
23
1 2
* 5 * * 8 * 10 * 12 13 * 15 16 * 18
3

* * 19 20 21
* * * * 18 17 16 15* * 23 24 25 * 27 28 * 30 * 32 33 34 * 36
* * 12
* 4
10
2
* * * * * 41 * * 44 * 46 47 48 * 50 * 52 53 *
* * * * * * * * * 60 * 62 * 64 65 66 67 * 69 70 71 72
57

< REAR >

BEC-IM (MAIN)

1 3 8
* 4
* * * * 7
9 10 14
16 18
* 21
* * * * *
23 24 25
* 30 31 33 *
29 34
* *
35 41 42 43
36
* * *
45 47 48
* * *
49
50
51 * * * 55
*

BEC-IA (AIRBAG)

8 1

* *
3
*
* *
* *
* *
14
*

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY

BTKG200F
BE -108 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CIRCUIT
FUSE (A) Circuit Protected
ACC 7.5A POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR & MIRROR FOLDING SWITCH, AUDIO, DIGITAL CLOCK
P/OUTLET #2 15A CIGARETTE LIGHTER & POWER OUTLET
START 7.5A BURGLAR ALARM RELAY, TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH, ECM
AIRBAG IND 7.5A INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
ATM LEVER SWITCH, STOP LAMP SWITCH, INPUT SPEED SENSOR, OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR,
ENG 7.5A TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH, PCM, VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR, ECM, TCM,
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH, FUEL FILTER WARNING SWITCH
TRIP COMPUTER, BACK WARNING BUZZER, RHEOSTAT, ESP SWITCH,
IG1 7.5A
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH, GENERATOR
ABS CONTROL MODULE, ESP CONTROL MODULE, YAW RATE SENSOR, STEERING ANGLE SENSOR,
ABS 7.5A
MULTIPURPOSE CHECK CONNECTOR
AIRBAG 15A SRS CONTROL MODULE
PEDAL 15A PEDAL ADJUST RELAY
P/OUTLET #1 15A CIGARETTE LIGHTER & POWER OUTLET
ASS P/SEAT 20A PASSENGER POWER SEAT MODULE
DRV P/SEAT 30A LIMIT SWITCH, DRIVER POWER SEAT MODULE
OBD-II 7.5A DATA LINK CONNECTOR, MULTIPURPOSE CHECK CONNECTOR
ROOM 7.5A VANITY LAMP LH(RH), MAP LAMP, A/C CONTROL MODULE, REAR ROOM LAMP SWITCH, OVER HEAD CONSOLE
VRS 10A VRS SWITCH, VRS MODULE
ILLUMI 7.5A INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE
AMP 25A AMP
SEAT WARMER 20A SEAT WARMER RELAY
SUNROOF 25A SUNROOF MODULE
AUDIO 15A STEP LAMP LH(RH), AUDIO
A/C CONTROL MODULE, DIGITAL CLOCK, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, TRIP COMPUTER, DOOR MODULE,
MEMORY 7.5A
FRONT AREA MODULE, DRIVER POWER SEAT MODULE, POWER TAIL GATE MODULE
IG2 #1 7.5A MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH, A/C CONTROL MODULE, ELECTRO CHROMIC MIRROR, RAIN SENSOR, RELAY BOX
DOOR MODULE, REAR A/C CONTROL SWITCH, FRONT AREA MODULE,
IG2 #2 7.5A
DRIVER POWER SEAT MODULE, POWER TAIL GATE MODULE
DDM 30A DRIVER DOOR MODULE, SAFETY POWER WINDOW MOTOR
ADM 30A PASSENGER DOOR MODULE

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY


BTKG200G
FUSES AND RELAYS BE -109

RAM (REAR AREA MODULE)

< FRONT > < REAR >

(TAIL GATE) (ROOF)


BCM-RR2 BCM-RR1
1
*
10
11
*3 16
* 14 13
* 11 10
*
8 7 6 4 3 2 1
* * *
13 5
14 6
15 7
16 8
(FLOOR) (FLOOR)
BCM-RF2 BCM-RF1

39 38 37 36 34 33 32 31
* *

3 4
* * * 6 7 8 * 19 20 21 42 41
*
*
30 29
*
*

10 11 25 24 23
* * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*

22 23 15 11 10
* * * * * * * 40 * 20
*
31
* * * 35 * 37 * * * * * * 7
* 5 4 3 2 1

BEC-RF1 (FLOOR)
BEC-RR (TAIL GATE)

14 13 12 11 8
* * * * * * * * * *
50 36
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
* 16 *
RR D/ RR
LOCK WIPER RR 46
20A 15A RR DEFOG
DE- * * * * * * *
FOG 52 38
RELAY
25A * 18 *
POWER P/
TAIL GATE 39 11
QUAR
30A -TER
RR
P/WIN 10A
-RH
25A
LUG- 40
PSD-RH
30A
PSD-LH
30A GAGE *
7.5A BEC-RF2 (FLOOR)
RR
P/WIN
-LH RR RR * 41 * * *
25A FUEL
DOOR
P/ P/
OTLT OTLT
* * * * 25 20 * * 1 2 3 4 5 6
*
15A -LH -RH
15A 15A
55 43 33 21
* 8
* * * 12 13
*
22 14 8
* * * * *

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY

BTKG200H
BE -110 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CIRCUIT
FUSE (A) Circuit Protected
PSD-LH 30A POWER SLIDING DOOR MODULE LH

PSD-RH 30A POWER SLIDING DOOR MODULE RH

RR DEFOG 25A RR DEFOG RELAY, REAR DEFOGGER

POWER TAIL GATE 30A POWER TAIL GATE MODULE

QUARTER GLASS OPEN RELAY LH, QUARTER GLASS CLOSE RELAY LH


P/QUARTER 10A QUARTER GLASS OPEN RELAY RH, QUARTER GLASS CLOSE RELAY RH
QUARTER GLASS MOTOR LH, QUARTER GLASS MOTOR RH

RR WIPER 10A REAR WIPER RELAY, REAR WIPER MOTOR

RR D/LOCK S/DOOR LOCK RELAY, S/DOOR UNLOCK RELAY


20A
SLIDING DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR, TAIL GATE LOCK ACTUATOR

RR P/OTLT-LH 15A REAR POWER OUTLET LH

RR P/OTLT-RH 15A REAR POWER OUTLET RH

FUEL DOOR 15A FUEL FILLER RELAY, FUEL FILLER ACTUATOR

S/DOOR WINDOW RELAY (UP) LH, S/DOOR WINDOW RELAY (DN) LH,
RR P/WIN-LH 25A
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH

S/DOOR WINDOW RELAY (UP) RH, S/DOOR WINDOW RELAY (DN) RH,
RR P/WIN-RH 25A
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH

LUGGAGE 7.5A LUGGAGE LAMP, POWER TAIL GATE ON/OFF SWITCH

USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY

BTKG200I
FUSES AND RELAYS BE -111

INSPECTION EF957DBB 3. If system of some relay is not operate accurately, re-


place with a new one and check the system.
FUSE

1. Be sure there is no play in the fuse holders, and that [TYPE E]


the fuses are held securely.
30 86
2. Are the fuse capacities for each circuit correct?

3. Are there any blown fuses?


If a fuse is to be replaced, be sure to use a new fuse

85

30
of the same capacity. Always determine why the fuse 87 85

87

86
blew first and completely eliminate the problem before
installing a new fuse.

RELAY [TYPE F]

1. Be sure that the relays are held the each module se- 85 87A 87
curely.

2. Are the relay types for each circuit correct?

87 87A 85

30
86 30

86 LTKG201H

ATKF202B
BE -112 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT E1AEA40C

IPM (INSTRUMENT PANEL MODULE)

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A). (Refer to the


Body group - Crash pad).

ATKF140A

3. Disconnect the receiver antenna cable and connec-


tors (5EA). Remove IPM mounting nuts (3EA) and
IPM (A).

ATKF140B

4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedures.


FUSES AND RELAYS BE -113

ICM (INTEGRATED CIRCUIT INSPECTION EBBCE610

MODULE) RELAY BOX FRONT BLOWER

DESCRIPTION EEC3CDF5
Check for continuity between the terminals.

1. There should be continuity between the No.1 in the


The ICM (Integrated circuit module) relay (A) is united with
ICM-A and No.10 in the ICM-B terminals when power
many kinds of relays and installed side of the in-panel mod-
and ground are connected to the No.7 in the ICM-A
ule.
and No.13 terminals in the ICM-B terminals.

2. There should be no continuity between the No.1 in


the ICM-A and No.10 terminals in the ICM-B terminals
when power is disconnected.

REAR BLOWER

Check for continuity between the terminals.

1. There should be continuity between the No.4 in the


A ICM-A and No.12 in the ICM-B terminals when power
and ground are connected to the No.2 in the ICM-A
and No.14 terminals in the ICM-B terminals.

2. There should be no continuity between the No.4 in the


ATKF201D
ICM-A and No.12 in the ICM-B terminals when power
is disconnected.

SEAT HEATER RELAYS

Check for continuity between the terminals.

1. There should be continuity between the No.9 and


1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 No.6 terminals when power and ground are con-
4
nected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals in the ICM-B.
5 6 7 8
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2. There should be no continuity between the No.9 and
[Connector A] [Connector B]
No.6 terminals when power is disconnected.
KEY INTERLOCK

Check for continuity between the terminals.


LTKG201E 1. There should be continuity between the No.2 and
No.3 terminals when power and ground are con-
nected to the No.4 and No.5 terminals in the ICM-B.

2. There should be no continuity between the No.2 and


No.3 terminals when power is disconnected.
BE -114 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

INDICATORS AND GAUGES


COMPONENT LOCATION E1F7E161

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

2*

1*

4 8
7*
5 6

1. Cluster assembly 6. Brake fluid level warning switch


2. Seat belt switch 7. Parking brake switch
3. Vehicle speed sensor 8. Door switch
4. Engine coolant temperature sender 9. Fuel gauge sender
5. Oil pressure switch
BTKG260A
INDICATORS AND GAUGES BE -115

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

COMPONENTS E95ADFF0

<STANDARD>

<SUPER VISION>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

LTKG260B
BE -116 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT E2A92FD6 4. Disconnect the cluster connecter (A) and then remove
the cluster.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the cluster facia panel (B) after removing 2 A


screws (A) and disconnecting trip switch connector.

ATKF261D

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.


A

ATKF261B

3. Pull out the cluster (A) from the housing after remov-
ing 4 screws.

ATKF261C
INDICATORS AND GAUGES BE -117

INSPECTION EAD7D2F2 [KPH]

SPEEDOMETER Veloc-
ity 20 40 60 80 100
1. Adjust the pressure of the tires to the specified level.
(KPH)
2. Drive the vehicle onto a speedometer tester. Use Toler-
+2.6 +2.9 +3.5 +4.1 +5
wheel chocks as appropriate. ance
0 0 0 0 0
(KPH)
3. Check if the speedometer indicator range is within the
standard values. Veloc-
ity 120 140 160 180 220
(KPH)
CAUTION
Toler-
Do not operate the clutch suddenly or increase/ +6 +7 +8 +9 +11
ance
decrease speed rapidly while testing. 0 0 0 0 0
(KPH)

NOTE
Tire wear and tire over or under inflation will increase TACHOMETER
the indication error.
1. Connect the scan tool to the diagnostic link connector
or install a tachometer.

2. With the engine started, compare the readings of


the tester with that of the tachometer. Replace the
tachometer if the tolerance is exceeded.

CAUTION
• Reversing the connections of the tachometer
will damage the transistor and diodes inside.
• When removing or installing the tachometer,
A be careful not to drop it or subject it to severe
shock.

ETKE100E
Revo-
[MPH] lution 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 Engine
(rpm)
Velocity
10 20 40 60 Toler- Gaso-
(MPH) ±100 ±125 ±150 ±150
ance line
Toler- (rpm)
+1.3 +1.7 +2.3 +3.0 ±100 ±125 ±150 ±150 Diesel
ance
0 0 0 0
(MPH) Toler-
ance 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 Engine
Velocity
80 100 120 - (rpm)
(MPH)
Revo- Gaso-
Toler- ±150 ±180 ±210 -
+4.0 +5.0 +6.0 lution line
ance -
0 0 0 (rpm)
(MPH) ±150 ±180 - - Diesel
BE -118 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FUEL GAUGE SENDER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENDER

1. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between 1. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between
terminals 1 and 2 of sender connector (A) at each float the terminal 2 and ground.
level.
Tem-
pera- 140 185 230 257
E/G
A ture (60) (85) (110) (127.4)
1 2 3
[ F( C)]
4 5 6 Resis-
Gaso-
tance 128 56.1 25.2 16.1
line
F (Ω )
Tem-
1/2
pera- 120 160 230 260
Warning E/G
ture (49) (71) (110) (127.4)
lamp
E Ω [ F( C)]
Resis-
tance 209.6 88.7 24.3 15.9 Diesel
(Ω )
ETRF262B

2. Also check that the resistance changes smoothly OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
when the float is moved from "E" to "F".
1. Check that there is continuity between the oil press
Position switch terminal and ground with the engine off.
Resistance(Ω )
Sender (E) 200 2. Check that there is no continuity between the terminal
and ground with the engine running.
Warning lamp 160
1/2 54.5 3. If operation is not as specified, replace the switch.

Sender (F) 8

CAUTION
If the height resistance is not within specifica- A
tions, replace the fuel sender as an assembly.
After completing this test, wipe the sender dry
and reinstall it in the fuel tank.

KTQE530A
INDICATORS AND GAUGES BE -119

4. Connect the oil pressure switch wire harness. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP

5. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check that the warning 1. Ignition "ON"
lamp lights up. If the warning lamp doesn’t light, test
the wire harness. 2. Release the parking brake.

3. Remove the connector from the brake fluid level warn-


ing switch.

4. Ground the connector at the harness side.

5. Verify that the warning lamp lights.

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

The parking brake switch is a push type. It is located at


the side of the parking brake pedal.

1. Check that there is continuity between the terminal


and switch body with the switch (A) ON.

2. Check that there is no continuity between the terminal


KTQE530B
and switch body with the switch OFF.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH
If continuity is not as specified, replace the switch or in-
1. Remove the connector (A) from the switch located at spect its ground connection.
the brake fluid reservoir (B).
A
2. Verify that continuity exists between switch terminals
1 and 2 while pressing the switch (float) down with a
rod.

B
A

1 2

ATKF262D

ATJF260D
BE -120 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DOOR SWITCH SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP

Remove the door switch and check for continuity between With the ignition switch turned ON, verify that the lamp
the terminals. If continuity is not as specified, replace the glows.
door switch.
Seat belt condition Warning lamp
Fastened OFF
Not fastened ON
1 2 3

ATKF122E

Terminal Body
Position 1 2 (Ground)
Free(Door open)

Push(Door close)
ETQF180D

SEAT BELT SWITCH

1. Remove the connector from the switch.

2. Check for continuity between terminals.

Seat belt condition Continuity


Fastened Non-conductive (∞ Ω )
Not fastened Conductive (0 Ω )

V5BE060Q
POWER DOOR LOCKS BE -121

POWER DOOR LOCKS


COMPONENT LOCATION EBDAB271

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type. Transmitter
RHD type is symmetrical.

Unlock button
Unlock button PTG (Power tailgate) button
PSD (Power sliding door) button
Panic button

2*

3*
1*

6
7

1. DDM (Driver Door Module) 5. Tailgate lock actuator


2. ADM (Assistant Door Module) 6. Front door lock actuator
3. IPM (In-Panel Module) 7. Sliding door lock actuator
4. RAM (Rear Area Module)
BTKG280A
BE -122 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCK SLIDING DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


ACTUATORS 1. Remove the sliding door trim panel. (Refer to the
Body group - rear door)
INSPECTION E61B24DD
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.
FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body


group - front door)

2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3
4 5 6

ATKF122F

1 2 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and


3 4 ground according to the table. To prevent damage to
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.

ATKF122A Terminal
1 2 3
Position
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to Lock
Left
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Unlock
Lock
Terminal Right
2 4
Position Unlock
Lock LTKG122D
Front left
Unlock
Lock
Front right
Unlock
LTKG122B
POWER DOOR LOCKS BE -123

TAILGATE LOCK ACTUATOR FRONT DOOR LOCK SWITCH

1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. (Refer to the Body 1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body
group - tailgate) group - Front door)

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3 1 2
4 5 6 3 4

ATKF122F ATKF122A

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
ground according to the table. To prevent damage to switch position according to the table.
the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
Terminal
1 2 3
Terminal Position
4 6
Position Lock
Front left
LOCK + Unlock

UNLOCK + Lock
Front right
LTKG122K
Unlock
LTKG122G
BE -124 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SLIDING DOOR LOCK SWITCH TAILGATE LOCK SWITCH

1. Remove the rear door trim panel. (Refer to the Body 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. (Refer to the Body
group - Rear door) group - tailgate)

2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6

ATKF122C ATKF122F

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. switch position according to the table.

Terminal Terminal
4 5 6 1 2
Position Position
Lock Unlock
Left
Unlock LTKG121M

Lock
Right
Unlock
LTKG122H
POWER DOOR LOCKS BE -125

FRONT DOOR KIEY SWITCH TAILGATE KEY SWITCH

1. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel. (Refer to the Body
group - Front door) group - tailgate)

2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.

1 2 3 1 2 3

ATKF282G ATKF282I

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. switch position according to the table.

Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 Position 1 2 3
Position
Lock LOCK
Left
Unlock UNLOCK
Lock LTKG282J
Right
Unlock
LTKG282H
BE -126 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH INSPECTION E699CB7E

1. The DDM inputs can be checked using the scan tool..


REPLACEMENT E8DCDC17

DDM/ADM 2. To check the Input Value of door lock switch, select


option "09. BODY CONTROL MODULE".
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body SEDONA 06-
group - Front door)

3. Remove the door module (A) mounting screws (5EA)


after disconnecting the connector (3EA) from the ac-
tuator.

BTKG311A

3. Select option "04. DRIVER DOOR MODULE".

A
SEDONA 06-

ATKF284A

4. Remove the front door modules (DDMDM) from the


front door trim panel.

BTKG182B

4. Select option "02. CURRENT DATA".

SEDONA 06-
A

ATKF284B

BTKG182C
POWER DOOR LOCKS BE -127

LTKG284C

5. To check the Input Value of door lock switch in force


mode, select option "05. ACTUATION TEST".

SEDONA 06-

BTKG284D

SEDONA 06-

BTKG284E
BE -128 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SLIDING DOOR 6. Obstacle Detection


The obstacle detection force is not adjustable. Fac-
SYSTEM tors that may affect the force are vehicle grade, bat-
tery voltage, or dirt in sliding door tracks.
TROUBLESHOOTING E7A13DEE
7. Outside handle response time
When the vehicle has been parked and OFF, there
Check the following items prior to performing Power Sliding
may be a delay before power operation starts after the
Door System service.
outside handle is pulled. This is normal because the
1. Manual movement PSDM(Power sliding door module) must wake up and
Make sure the sliding door moves manually. Place check for proper conditions before starting a power
the ON/OFF switch on the overhead console in the open operation.
OFF position. Move the door manually and check for
8. The sliding doors are not identical. Open and close
proper door fit and latch effort. Check for interference
times and obstacle detection efforts may vary when
with other body parts such as latch striker, trim, and
comparing the two doors. This is normal and is
weather seals.
caused by vehicle build conditions such as door fit
2. Battery voltage and rolling resistance.
Make sure the battery is fully charged. The PSD sys-
9. Scan tool Diagnostic tool
tem is an electronic device and requires a minimum
Connect Scan tool to the K-line and check status of
battery voltage to operate. The PSDM(Power sliding
system.
door module) monitors the battery voltage present at
the PSDM input battery input and will not permit op-
eration if the battery voltage is out of range.

3. Fuses
Two fuses protect the battery supply to the
PSDM(Power sliding door module), one for Power,
and one for logic. Check that the fuses are intact

4. Repeat Operations
Make sure the customer has not been operating the
PSD repeatedly while the vehicle is turned off. The
battery will be discharged and the PSDM(Power slid-
ing door module) will not permit operation.

5. Vehicle on Steep Grade


Make sure the customer has not been operating the
PSD system when the vehicle is parked on a steep
grade (greater than 30%). The system will operate
but the force of gravity and normal flex of the vehicle
body may affect proper operation.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -129

POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Sliding Door opens Accidental activation or failure of
Check for shorted or defective switch
unexpectedly open/close command switch
Check wiring connections
Failure of latch assembly
Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Disconnect then reconnect battery or fuse to reset
Failure of Power Sliding Door module and function sliding door. If no function
or Body Control module exists check for loose wire connections. See Body
Diagnostic Manual for detailed procedures
Sliding Door will not power Not in Park or false indication Check switch status with SCAN tool
open or close
Check for proper voltage at the PSDM.
Battery voltage at PSDM is too low
Charge battery
Blown fuse Check for blown fuse
BCM or sliding door control
Check for diagnostic trouble codes
module critical fault codes
Check wire connections and for blown fuse
Failure of latch assembly Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of latch assembly
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
Establish location of binding and replace
Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
Wiring problems (system Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
or vehicle) Refer to wiring diagrams
Power loss during Sliding Wiring problems (system Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
Door operation or vehicle) Refer to wiring diagrams
Battery voltage at PSDM is too low
Check for proper voltage at the PSDM.
<9.5V to start operation and
Charge battery
<8.0V to continue operation
Failure of Power Sliding Door
Check for diagnostic trouble codes
or Body Control Module
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
Sliding Door does not close Check latch and striker alignment
to primary latch position Door mis-alignment
Check rollers and track alignment
Establish location of binding and adjust or
Binding or sticking of components
replace necessary components
Failure of Power Sliding Door
Check for diagnostic trouble codes
or Body Control Module
Inspect seals for damage, mis-assembly, foreign
Sliding Door seal force too high
matter or other possible obstruction
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
BE -130 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Latch will not release from Not in Park or false indication Check switch status with SCAN tool
primary position
Battery voltage at PSDM is too low
Check for proper voltage at the PSDM
<9.5V to start operation and
Charge battery
<8.0V to continue operation
Blown fuse Check fuse and replace if required
Check switch status with scan tool
Check for foreign matter or damaged components
Failure of latch assembly preventing the operation of latch assembly
Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual.
Replace latch assembly, if necessary
Failure of outside or inside
Check handle connections on brainplate.
handle connection
Failure of Power Sliding Door
Check for diagnostic trouble codes.
or Body Control Module
Establish location of binding and adjust or
Binding or sticking of components
replace necessary components
Key fob or overhead Blown Fuse Check fuse and replace
console switch does not
Check for proper voltage at the PSDM.
power operate sliding door Battery voltage at PSDM is too low
Charge battery
Wiring problems (system Refer to wiring diagrams
or vehicle) Check for diagnostic trouble codes.
Does Not Power Unlatch Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of latch assembly

Failure of latch assembly Check for diagnostic trouble codes.


Check Detent switch.
Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual
Failure of Latch Release Actuator Check actuator and replace if necessary
Wiring problems (system Refer to wiring diagrams
or vehicle) Check for diagnostic trouble codes.

Failure of Body Control Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual


Module (BCM) Replace BCM if necessary
Reprogram key fob
Failure of key fob
Replace key fob if necessary
Failure of Power Sliding Check for diagnostic trouble codes.
Door Module See Body Diagnostic Manual for detailed procedures
Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of motor assembly
Check wire connections
Failure of sliding door motor
assembly Drive Unit clutch does not engage.
Replace Drive Unit.
Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
Replace motor if necessary
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -131

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Sliding Door does not Check if sliding door powers open to hold open latch
stay open Hold Open Latch not working
Check if H-O-L is working
High inside/outside Check for smooth manual operation
opening effort Bound cables
Check for broken attachments
Drive unit jammed or did Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
not disengage Replace components, if necessary
Establish location of binding and replace
Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
Sliding Door continues Check wire connections and Detent switch
to power close
Failure of latch assembly Check for foreign matter
Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
Control Module Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Wiring problems (system Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
or vehicle) Refer to wiring diagrams
Sliding Door continues Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Failure of PSDM
to power open See Body Diagnostic Manual for detailed procedures
Wiring problems (system Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
or vehicle) Refer to Wiring Diagrams
Sliding Door opens Check for proper voltage at the PSDM
Battery voltage at PSDM is too low
very slowly Charge battery
Bound cables Replace drive unit if necessary
Establish location of binding and replace
Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
Grade of vehicle too steep for
Operate sliding door manually
power operation
Failure of sliding door motor
Replace motor assembly, if necessary
assembly
Squeaks, Noises and rattles Foreign material in Sliding Door Remove foreign material
Worn or Loose components Check and tighten loose components
BE -132 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DTC LIST BCM DISPLAY UNIT


10 Ignition Swtich LOW/HIGH
DTC CODE DISPLAY
Child Lock Status (PSD
B1101 Battery Voltage High 11 Lock/Unlock
Only)
B1102 Battery Voltage Low
12 Lock Status (PSD Only) Lock/Unlock
B1105 Reference Voltage Fault
Not
13 Handle Switch (PSD Only)
B1223 VSS Fault Pressed/Pressed
B1270 Optical Sensor-1 Output Stuck High Not
14 Local Open/Close Switch
B1271 Optical Sensor-1 Output Stuck Low Pressed/Pressed

B1272 Optical Sensor-2 Output Stuck High Not


15 Master Open/Close Switch
Pressed/Pressed
B1273 Optical Sensor-2 Output Stuck Low
Learn Process Complete Not Com-
B1274 Broken Cable(PSD Only) 16
Status plete/Complete
B1580 Ignition Start Switch Short High 17 Vehicle Speed Slow Status ≥ 5kph / < 5kph
B1586 Chime Open Or Short High 18 On/Off Switch ON/OFF
B1621 ECU Fault 19 Start Switch LOW/HIGH
B1645 Drive Unit Fault 20 PSD Right Select Status Left/Right
B2420 Drive Motor Open 21 Fuel Filler Door switch LOW/HIGH
B2421 Drive Motor Short High 22 Door/Gate Open Feedback Voltages
B2422 Drive Motor Short Low 23 Door/Gate Close Feedback Voltages
B2423 Clutch Open Or Short High 24 Unlatch Feedback Voltages
B2424 Clutch Short Low 25 Clutch Feedback Voltages
B2425 Pinch strip(PSD) open or Stuck High 26 Door/Gate Position Count -
B2426 Pinch strip(PSD) Stuck Low 27 Most Recent Cinch Time ms
B2450 Unlatch Motor (PSD) Short High 2nd Most Recent Cinch
28 ms
Unlatch or Cinch Motor (PTG) / Unlatch Time
B2451
Motor (PSD) Short Low 3rd Most Recent Cinch
29 ms
Time
INPUT/OUTPUT MONITORING 4th Most Recent Cinch
30 ms
Time
BCM DISPLAY UNIT 31 Left Pinch Strip Voltage Voltages
1 Battery Logic Voltage Voltages 32 Right Pinch Strip Voltage Voltages
2 Battery Power Voltage Voltages
3 Optical Sensor Power Voltages
Door/Gate Optical Sensor
4 LOW/HIGH
2-Logical State
Door/Gate Optical Sensor
5 LOW/HIGH
1-Logical State
6 Detent Switch LOW/HIGH
OUT OF RANGE/
7 Power Battery Voltage
IN RANGE
Pinch strip-pinch Not
8
condition(PSD Only) Pinched/Pinched
9 Park Switch Out Of Park/Park
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -133

COMPONENT LOCATION EBE2ADA9

This illustration is shows the LHD type.


RHD type is symmetrical. Transmitter

Lock button
Unlock button
Power sliding door button

Panic button

7
6
5
4

3
2

1. Overhead console switch 5. Power sliding door chime


2. Power sliding door trim switch 6. Power sliding door drive unit
3. In/out door handle switch 7. Power sliding door module
4. Latch (including detent switch)
BTKG229A
BE -134 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION EB5DADB7 2. POWER SLIDING DOOR CONTROL MODULE


(PSDM)
Power Sliding Door is an electro-mechanical system de- The PSD System uses a power sliding door control
signed to provide power opening and closing of a vehicle’s module (microprocessor controller) to operate the
sliding door through the push of a button of the transmitter drive unit. Signals are received from the vehicle and
key or the main control buttons on the overhead console used to start or stop power open or close operations.
or the sub control buttons on the center pillar trim or in- The PSDM cannot be adjusted or repaired and if
side/outside door handle switch. found to be faulty, must be replaced.
The power sliding door will reverse direction of travel if re-
sistance to movement is detected while the door is being
closed. If resistance to movement is detected while the
power sliding door is being opened, the door will stop mov-
ing.

1. DRIVE UNIT
Drive unit (A) consists of a DC motor, optical sen-
sor, clutch, cables and pulleys and wire harness. The
clutch and motor portion of the assembly provides the
power and torque required to open or close the slid-
ing door. The clutch assembly is used to connect or
disconnect the motor so that the Sliding Door may be
B
moved manually, if desired.

ATKF229C

3. SLIDING DOOR CHIME (C)


When the power sliding door detect the resistance or
abnormal operation, the chime will sound.

ATKF229B

ATKF229D
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -135

4. ANTI-PINCH STRIP (D) 6. DOOR LATCH (B)


Secondary Obstacle Detection is provided by means The door latch contains a detent switch [C] used to
of a contact type strip. Strip is composed of two con- detect the latch state and report the latch state to the
ductive zones separated by an air gap. When strip is power sliding door module.
compressed, conductive zones make contact, activat-
ing the switch signal.
Copper wire is extruded through conductive material
B
to prevent resistive buildup. Terminating resistor is
molded into end of strip to detect failures of strip.

ATKF229G

D
7. KEYLESS ENTRY (A)
Power sliding doors can be opened and closed by
pressing the button on the RKE more than 0.5 sec.
ATKF229E Open operation shall be reserved when an additional
open/close signal is received during power opening.
5. OVERHEAD CONSOLE AND REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH (A)
The power sliding doors can be opened and closed
automatically with the RKE and the main control but- A
ton on the overhead console.

B
PWR

ATKF229M

ATKF229F
BE -136 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

8. INSIDE/OUTSIDE DOOR HANDLE SWITCH OPERATION EDFB1FD6

Power sliding door can be opened and closed manu-


ally/automatically from inside or outside vehicle. POWER SLIDING DOOR OPEN/CLOSE

Outside door handle switch (A) 1. The right/left sliding door is opened and closed auto-
matically if the main switch (A) is pressed on the over-
head console.

A B

PWR

ATKF229H

ATKF229J
Inside door handle switch (B)
2. When the power ON/OFF button (PWR) (B) is ON, the
power sliding door and power tailgate can be opened
and closed automatically by using trim switch.

3. When the sliding door window is open (more than 3


B in/80 mm), the power sliding door will not power open
fully but will open to the 3/4 position and the chime will
sound 3 times.

4. General rules for chime functions


- Chime shall operate when a power operation
cannot be performed as requested except han-
dle pull : 1 Time (Duration 0.5 second on)
- Chime shall operate when an obstacle has been
detected : 3 Time (0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off)
ATKF229I - Chime shall operate if PSD has not reached pri-
mary latch position after a power cinch cycle : 3
Time (0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off)

WARNING
Do not leave the power sliding door at half-opened
position. Close the window and then open the
door fully. Half-opened door is held and then
released after 10 minutes. The chime sounds
3 times to indicate the door is released. If the
vehicle is stopped on a downward slope, it may
move and cause an injury.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -137

POWER SLIDING DOOR OPERATING CONDITION CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

1. The sliding door will not power open when vehicle is To prevent children from opening the power sliding doors
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gearshift lever is from the inside, the child safety locks (A) should be used
not in P (Park) for automatic transaxle. whenever children are in the vehicle.

2. The power sliding door will not open with the transmit-
ter or the main control button when all power sliding
doors are locked and closed.

3. The power sliding door will detect the resistance, then


stop movement or move to the full open position to
allow the object to be cleared.
A
4. The left sliding door cannot be opened when the fuel
filler lid is open.

5. If the automatic stop and reversal feature operates


continuously more than twice during one opening or
closing operation, the power sliding door may stop at
that position. At this time, close the doors manually
ATKF229K
and operate the door automatically again.

6. The power sliding door can be opened by pulling the WARNING


outside door handle while the door is unlocked and Be careful, when the child safety lock is used in
child safety lock is engaged. an accident, that the passengers are not held in
vehicle.
NOTE
- If the fuel filler lid is opened when the left sliding
door is not closed completely, the door may be
opened. Close the left sliding door before refuel-
ing to prevent possible damage to the door or the
fuel filler lid.
- Sudden starting or accelerating the vehicle while
the door is closing could cause it to open the door
and result in a serious injury or damage to cargo.

CAUTION
- The door could suddenly close by itself and
cause a serious injury especially when stop-
ping on a down-hill grade.
- To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the power sliding door
and power tailgate at open position for a long
time.

WARNING
- Let the rear passengers get on or off the vehi-
cle after the door is open fully. Sudden clos-
ing could cause a serious injury.
- To prevent power sliding door system dam-
age, don’t use excessive force to open/close
the door during operation.
BE -138 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER OPERATION The PSD system shall learn the position of each travel
extreme: full open and full closed.
The PSD system shall not open the Sliding Door when the
vehicle is moving.
The PSD system shall operate through the full range of
Sliding Door travel.

- : No action Close Open X : Stop


Operation
Vehicle Door Lock
Door Position Zone ON/OFF RKE Key PSD main PSD sub Door handle
Motion Status
fob Note 2 switch switch switch
OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X
1 or 2 Not Locked
ON
Locked X(Chime 1 T) X
OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X
3 or 4
Not ON Any
Moving
OFF Any X X
Closing
ON Any
Opening 1 or 2 ON/OFF Any X X X X
OFF Any X X
Opening 3 or 4
ON Any
1 or 2 ON/OFF Any - X(Chime 1 T) X(Chime 1 T) X
OFF Any - X(Chime 1 T)
3 or 4
ON Any -
Moving Any - X X X
Closing ON/OFF
Opening 1 or 2 ON/OFF Any - X X X
OFF Any - X X
Opening 3 or 4
ON Any -
Any
1 or 2 ON Manual Move in open/close direction
Any
Any
Any
3 or 4 ON Manual Move in open/close direction
Any

Any OFF Any Manual Move


LTKG229L

1. Vehicle condition The door travel is divided into four zones starting at
Moving the full closed and latched position.
- (IGN=OFF and Vehicle Speed > 5 km/h) or Dimensions are at the rear edge of the door and are
(IGN= ON and (Vehicle Speed > 5 km/h or PIN approximate.
- not P/N)) Zone 1 - Latching - 0 to 10 mm (primary and sec-
ondary latch positions) .
Not moving Zone 2 - Near latching position including curved track
- (IGN=OFF and Vehicle Speed < 5 km/h) or portion -10 to 300 mm.
(IGN= ON and (Vehicle Speed < 5 km/h and Zone 3 - Straight track - 300 mm to hold open latch.
TRANS - P/N)) Zone 4 - Hold Open - door in hold open latch.

2. DOOR TRAVEL - ZONES


POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -139

POWER SLIDING DOOR OPERATION ADJUSTMENT EEBAFEBE

1. Vehicle condition POWER SLIDING DOOR INITIALIZATION


Stopping condition
- When the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC A learn cycle must be performed whenever the power is
position, vehicle is stopped or moving below 5 removed, a Power Sliding Door component is removed or
km/h. replaced, or a sliding door adjustment is performed. The
- When the ignition switch is in the ON position, learn cycle enables the Power Sliding Door control module
vehicle is stopped or moving below 5 km/h (PSDM) to learn the range of full travel and effort required
(the gearshift lever is in N(Neutral) for manual to power the Sliding Door which allows it to perform prop-
transaxle, P(Park) for automatic transaxle). erly and safely.

POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM RESET


Driving condition
- When the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC Certain conditions may require that the PSD system be
position, vehicle is moving above 5 km/h. reset
- When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
vehicle is moving above 5 km/h or the gearshift 1. Remove the MEMORY fuse that provides power to the
lever is not in N(Neutral) for manual transaxle, PSDM.
P(Park) for automatic transaxle.
2. Wait 1 minute. Replace fuse. Initialize PSDM.
2. Door position
If the power sliding door is operated while the door INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
is in slightly-opened position (less than 300mm), the
1. Manually close and latch the sliding door.
door is automatically opened fully. If the power sliding
door is operated while the door is in slightly-opened 2. Power the sliding door open using the remote control,
position (more than 300mm), the door is automatically Open/Close switch, B-pillar switch, or handle.
closed completely.
3. Power the door close from full open to full closed po-
3. If the door handle is pulled from inside or outside while sition.
the door is locked or child safety lock is engaged, the
power sliding door is not opened. 4. Power the door open again to full open position.

ALTERNATE METHOD

1. Remove the black connector (J2) from the PSDM.

2. Wait a short time. Replace connector. Initialize


PSDM.

CAUTION
- The PSD system initialization must start from
the primary or secondary latched position.
- Obstacle detection shall be active during Slid-
ing Door initialization.
- Work on level ground.
BE -140 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SLIDING DOOR DRIVE 4. Select the "Actuation test" and "PSD open/close" to
UNIT operate tailgate motor.

INSPECTION ED3DAAC1

SLIDING DOOR MOTOR INSPECTION PSD - RH

1. It will be able to diagnose defects of PSD motor with


scan tool quickly.

2. Select model and menu(BCM).

SEDONA 06-

LTKG291S

5. Replace the drive unit, if actuator operates abnormal.

DRIVE UNIT CLUTCH INSPECTION

1. Check the power sliding door control module in-


put/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of power sliding control module is abnor-
mal, replace power sliding door drive unit.
BTKG311A
2. When checking the clutch operation, select a vehicle
3. Select "rear area module(RAM)". type and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.

SEDONA 06- SEDONA 06-

BTKG311B BTKG311D
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -141

3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR" to check. OPTICAL SENSOR INSPECTION

1. Check the power sliding door control module in-


SEDONA 06- put/output value by using the diagnostic tool.

2. When checking the optical sensor, select a vehicle


type and "Power sliding/tailgate" menu.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG311E

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the clutch


feedback sensor output while operating power sliding
door in power mode.

BTKG311D

3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR" to check.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG291L

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.
BTKG311E

5. Change the drive unit, if there is no change during


operation.
BE -142 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the opti- REPLACEMENT E8CFFB92

cal sensor volt while operating power sliding door in


power mode. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the rear trim panel (Refer to the Body group


- interior trim)

3. Disconnect the connectors (6EA) from the power slid-


ing door drive unit.

4. Remove the rear combination lamp (Refer to the Body


group - rear bumper)

5. Remove the mounting bolts (4EA) and rail cover (A).

LTKG291I

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. Change the drive unit, if there is no change during


operation.

ATKF291E

6. Pull the rear cable (A) and draw the cable clip (B) to
bottom of roller hinge post and then remove the rear
cable (A).

B A

ATKF291K
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -143

7. Remove the roller hinge bracket assembly (A) as be-


low. A

A
ATKF291F

10. Loosen the mounting bolt (1EA) and nuts (2EA). And
ATKF291N then remove the power sliding door drive unit assem-
bly after removing the front cable.
8. Remove the front cable (A) from center roller hinge
(B). TORQUE : 0.07 - 0.11N.m (0.007 - 0.011 kg.m)

11. Installation is the reverse of removal.

12. When installation, check the grease on the center


roller hinge barrel and club contact part (A).

ATKF291M

9. Loosen the bolts (2EA) and remove the rear pulley A


bracket (A). And then remove the front pulley bracket
(B) after loosening the mounting bolts (2EA) and nut
(1EA).
ATKF291R

TORQUE : 0.07 - 0.11N.m (0.007 - 0.011 kg.m)


WARNING
- A learn cycle must be performed whenever
the power is removed.
- Check the normal operation whenever a
power sliding door component is removed
or replaced. If the chime sound is heard,
check the DTC, wiring harness and cable
connections.
BE -144 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SLIDING DOOR


CONTROL MODULE (PSDM)

REPLACEMENT ECDBC15D

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal..

2. Remove the rear trim panel (Refer to the Body group


- interior trim)

3. Remove the connectors and mounting bolts (2EA)


from the power sliding door unit(A). And then remove
the power sliding door control module (B).

TORQUE : 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)

ATKF292A

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

WARNING
- A learn cycle must be performed whenever
the power is removed.
- Check the normal operation whenever a
power sliding door component is removed
or replaced. If the chime sound is heard,
check the DTC, wiring harness and cable
connections.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -145

POWER SLIDING DOOR CHIME

REPLACEMENT EB4D9ED9

1. Remove the rear side trim (Refer to the Body group -


interior trim).

2. Disconnect the sliding door chime connector (A) from


chime (B).

ATKF293A

3. Remove the chime from drive unit and replace it with


a new one.
BE -146 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DETENT SWITCH 4. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR".

INSPECTION ECE04B3E
SEDONA 06-

1. Detent switch detect the latch position within latch as-


sembly.

BTKG311E

Detent switch connector 5. Select the detent sensor output. And then check the
detent switch output with operating power sliding door.

LTKG294B

2. Check the power sliding door control module in-


put/output value by using the diagnostic tool.

3. When checking the detent switch, select a vehicle


type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE" menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG294A

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

6. If there is no change in output, change the latch as-


sembly.

BTKG311D
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -147

LATCH SWITCH 4. Select the sensor output. And then check the un-
latch feedback (Unlocked state) voltage while oper-
ating power sliding door in power mode.
INSPECTION E4E7D2FF

1. Check the power sliding door control module in-


put/output value by using the diagnostic tool.

2. When checking the latch, select a vehicle type and


"POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE" menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG295C

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. If there is no change in voltage, change the latch.

BTKG311D ANTI PINCH STRIP

3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR". 1. Check the power sliding door control module in-
put/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of door control module is abnormal, replace
SEDONA 06- anti pinch strip control module.

2. When checking the anti pinch strip operation, select


a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE"
menu.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG311E

BTKG311D
BE -148 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Select power sliding door.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG311E

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the anti


pinch strip sensor output while operating power slid-
ing door in power mode.

LTKG297A

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. Change the anti pinch strip sensor, if there is no


change from OFF to ON during operation.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -149

POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCH 4. Check the PSD PTG power control switch and PSD
left/right switch.

INSPECTION EB3FCB6E

OVERHEAD CONSOLE DOOR SWITCH


INSPECTION

1. Check the overhead console door switch input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation of
overhead console door switch is abnormal, check the
IPM and replace.

2. When checking the overhead console switch opera-


tion, select a vehicle type and "IPM" menu.

SEDONA 06-
LTKG296C

5. Confirm that output is changed by the controlling


ON/OFF of each switch on the overhead console.

DOOR HANDLE SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Check the power sliding door control module in-


put/output value by using the diagnostic tool. If the
operation of door control module is abnormal, replace
power sliding door control module.

2. When checking handle switch operation, select a ve-


BTKG296A hicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAIL GATE" menu.

3. Select a in panel module (IPM) and "CURRENT


DATA". SEDONA 06-

SEDONA 06-

BTKG311D

BTKG296B
BE -150 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Select the "POWER SLIDING DOOR" menu to check. TRIM SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Check the trim switch input/output value by using the


SEDONA 06- diagnostic tool. If the operation of rear area module
(RAM) is abnormal, replace RAM.

2. When checking the trim switch operation, select a ve-


hicle type and "IPM" menu.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG311E

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the handle


switch output value changed by the controlling PSD
or PTG.

BTKG296A

3. Select a rear area module (RAM) and sensor output.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG296D

5. Check that the handle switch output changed from


OFF to ON during PSD or PTG operation.

BTKG311B
POWER SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM BE -151

4. Check the value of RSD/LSD, left/right door switch. DOOR TRIM SWITCH

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the connector (B) and door trim switch (A)


from the center pillar (C) by using the scraper.

LTKG296F C

5. Confirm that the door switch output is changed by the


A
controlling ON/OFF switch on center pillar trim.
B

ATKF296H
REPLACEMENT E5C4A4A8

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


OVERHEAD CONSOLE SWITCH

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Open the sunglass case cover from the overhead con-


sole then remove the 2 screws holding the overhead
console (A). And then disconnect the connector (B).

B A

ATKF296G

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -152 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM tool and the proper Body Diagnostic Procedures manual.
The scan tool can be used to observe current switch sta-
tus recorded in the power tailgate control module to help
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - POWER the technician diagnose an inoperative switch.
TAILGATE SYSTEM EF39528E Before any testing of the power tailgate system is at-
tempted, the battery should be fully charged, all power
The power tailgate system is a complex system containing tailgate system inhibitors read and understood (Refer to
many components. In order to perform conclusive testing, power tailgate system description for list).
or receive outputs the power tailgate control module must Following are quick reference diagnostic tables to help
be checked. when diagnosing and testing the power tailgate system.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diag-
nose the power tailgate system requires the use of a scan

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Accidental activation or Failure of
Check for shorted or defective switch
open/close command switch
Check wiring connections
Failure of latch assembly Check for trouble codes, replace latch
Tailgate opens if necessary
unexpectedly
Disconnect then reconnect battery or
fuse to reset module, function tailgate,
Failure of Power Tailgate or Body
if no function exists check for loose wire
Control module
connections, see Body Diagnostic Manual
for detailed procedures
Not in Park or false indication Check switch status with SCAN tool
Check for proper voltage at the PTGM
Battery voltage at PTGM is too low
Charge battery
Blown fuse Check for blown fuse
Tailgate will not power Gas strut failure Check condition of tailgate gas struts
open or close
BCM or tailgate control module
Check code status with SCAN tool
critical fault codes
Check wire connections and for blown fuse
Failure of latch assembly Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of latch assembly
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
Establish location of binding and replace
Tailgate will not power Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
open or close
Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
Wiring problems (system or vehicle)
Refer to wiring diagrams
Troubleshoot using electrical schematics.
Wiring problems (system or vehicle)
Refer to wiring diagrams
Check for proper voltage at the PTGM
Power loss during Tailgate Battery voltage at PTGM is too low
Charge battery
operation
Failure of Power Tailgate or Body Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Control Module with SCAN tool
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -153

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Check wire connections and for blown fuse
Check for diagnostic trouble codes and
Failure of latch assembly cycle with SCAN tool
Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual.
Replace latch assembly, if necessary
No power latching in
Establish location of binding and replace
primary and/or secondary Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
positions
Failure of Power Tailgate or Body Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Control Module with scan tool
Inspect seals for damage, mis-assembly,
Tail Gate seal force too high
foreign matter or other possible obstruction
Failure of motor assembly Test motor assembly
Not in Park or false indication Check switch status with SCAN tool
Check for proper voltage at the PTGM
Battery voltage at PTGM is too low
Charge battery
Blown fuse Check fuse and replace if required
Failure of latch assembly Check switch status with scan tool
Check for foreign matter or damaged
components preventing the operation
Latch will not release from
of latch assembly
primary position
Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual.
Replace latch assembly, if necessary
Failure of outside handle connection Check handle of brainplate.
Failure of Power Tailgate or Body Check for diagnostic trouble codes and
Control Module cycle with scan tool
Establish location of binding and replace
Binding or sticking of components
necessary components

Key fob or overhead Blown Fuse Check fuse and replace


console switch does not Check for proper voltage at the PTGM
power operate tailgate Battery voltage at PTGM is too low
Charge battery
Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of latch assembly
Check for diagnostic trouble codes and
Does Not Power Unlatch Failure of latch assembly cycle with scan tool
Check pawl and/or ratchet switch
with SCAN tool
Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual
BE -154 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Failure of Power Tailgate Module Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual
Troubleshoot using body diagnostic manual
Failure of Body Control Module (BCM)
Replace BCM if necessary
Failure of RAM Replace RAM if necessary
Reprogram key fob
Failure of key fob
Replace key fob if necessary
Check for diagnostic trouble codes
with scan tool, see
Failure of Power Tailgate Module
Body Diagnostic Manual for detailed
Does Not Power Unlatch procedures
Check for foreign matter preventing the
operation of motor assembly
Check wire connections
Motor clutch does not engage, replace
Failure of tailgate motor assembly assembly
Full open switch inoperative, replace
switch, if necessary
Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
Replace motor, if necessary
Replace gas struts
Tailgate does not stay open Failure of tailgate gas struts
Check for broken attachments
Replace gas struts
Failure of tailgate gas struts
Check for broken attachments
High inside/outside Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
opening effort Drive unit jammed or did not disengage
Replace components, if necessary
Establish location of binding and replace
Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
Tailgate continues to Check wire connections and for blown fuse
Failure of latch assembly
cinch closed Check switches with SCAN tool
Check wire connections
Failure of latch assembly Check for foreign matter
Troubleshoot using Body Diagnostic Manual
Tail gate continues to
power close Check for diagnostic trouble codes
Control Module
with Scan tool
Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
Wiring problems (system or vehicle)
Refer to wiring diagrams
Check for diagnostic trouble codes and
Failure of PTGM or BCM cycle, see Body Diagnostic Manual for
detailed procedures
Tailgate continues to
power open Failure of motor assembly Check for continuous drive condition
Troubleshoot using electrical schematics
Wiring problems (system or vehicle)
Refer to Wiring Diagrams
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -155

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION


Check for proper voltage at the PTGM
Battery voltage at PTGM is too low
Charge battery
Failure of tailgate gas struts Replace gas struts, if necessary
Establish location of binding and replace
Tailgate opens very slowly Binding or sticking of components
necessary components
Grade of vehicle too steep for
Operate tailgate manually
power operation
Failure of tailgate motor assembly Replace motor assembly, if necessary
Foreign material in tail gate
Remove foreign material
Squeaks, Noises and rattles compartment
Worn/Loose components Check and tighten loose components
BE -156 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DTC LIST BCM DISPLAY UNIT

DTC Right Pinch Strip - Pinch Not Pinched /


DISPLAY 10
CODE Condition Pinched
B1101 Battery Voltage High Left Pinch Strip - Pinch Not Pinched /
11
Condition Pinched
B1102 Battery Voltage Low
Out Of Park
B1105 Reference Voltage Fault 12 Park Switch
/ Park
B1223 VSS Fault 13 Ignition Swtich LOW/HIGH
B1270 Optical Sensor-1 Output Stcuk High 14 Tail Lamp Flash Feedback LOW/HIGH
B1271 Optical Sensor-1 Output Stuck Low Not Pressed /
15 Local Open/Close Switch
B1272 Optical Sensor-2 Output Stuck High Pressed
B1273 Optical Sensor-2 Output Stuck Low Not Pressed /
16 Master Open/Close Switch
Pressed
B1580 Ignition Start Switch Short High
17 Spare Switch LOW/HIGH
B1585 Latch Switch Failure
Learn Process Complete Not Complet /
B1621 ECU Defective 18
Status Complete
B1645 Drive Unit Failure
19 Vehicle Speed Slow Status ≥ 5kph/<5kph
B2421 Drive Motor Short High
20 On/Off Switch ON/OFF
B2422 Drive Motor Short Low
21 Start Switch LOW/HIGH
B2423 Clutch Open Or Short High
22 Gate Open Feedback Voltages
B2424 Clutch Short Low
23 Cinch Feedback (PTG Only) Voltages
B2425 Left pinch stri open or Stuck High
24 Uncinch Feedback (PTG Only) Voltages
B2426 Left pinch strip stuck Low
25 Gate Close Feedback Voltages
B2427 Right Pinch Strip Open Or Stuck High
26 Unlatch Feedback Voltages
B2428 Right Pinch Strip Stuck Low
27 Unlatch Return Feedback Voltages
B2450 Unlatch or Cinch Motor short High
28 Clutch Feedback Voltages
B2451 Unlatch or Cinch Motor short Low
29 Gate Position Count -
B2452 Cinch motor open (PTG Only)
30 Most Recent Cinch Time ms
INPUT/OUTPUT MONITORING 31 2nd Most Recent Cinch Time ms
32 3rd Most Recent Cinch Time ms
BCM DISPLAY UNIT
33 4th Most Recent Cinch Time ms
1 Battery Logic Voltage Voltages
34 Left Pinch Strip Voltage Voltages
2 Battery Power Voltage Voltages
35 Right Pinch Strip Voltage Voltages
3 Optical Sensor Power Voltages
4 Gate Optical Sensor 2 LOW/HIGH
5 Gate Optical Sensor 1 LOW/HIGH
6 Detent Switch LOW/HIGH
7 Forkbolt Primary Switch LOW/HIGH
OUT OF
8 Power Battery Voltage RANGE / IN
RANGE
9 Forkbolt Secondary Switch LOW/HIGH
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -157

COMPONENT LOCATION EFCD213C

This illustration is shows the LHD type.


RHD type is symmetrical.

4
3
5

1. Overhead console switch 4. Power tail gate switch


2. Power tail gate drive unit 5. Power latch assembly
(Including control module) 6. Power tail gate handle
3. Power tail gate chime 7. Anti pinch strip
BTKG231A
BE -158 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION E59450ED

Power tail gate is an electro-mechanical system designed


to provide power opening and closing of a vehicle’ s tail B
gate through the push of a button of the transmitter key or
tail gate handle or the overhead console or switch of the
tail gate.
The power tail gate will reverse direction of travel if resis-
tance to movement is detected while the tail gate is being A
closed. If resistance to movement is detected while the
power tail gate is being opened, the tail gate will stop mov-
ing.

1. PTG DRIVE UNIT


Power tailgate drive unit consists of a DC motor, opti-
ATKF231B
cal sensor, clutch, push rod, rack and wire harness.
PTG drive unit is located in rear left on D-pillar panel.
3. ANTI PINCH STRIP (C)
PTG drive unit opens and closes the tail gate con-
During power closing or cinching, the PTG system
nected push rod automatically.
shall reverse to full open if an anti-pinch strip signal is
received. However, the anti-pinch strips will not work
when the Tailgate is idle in the full closed, full open,
or stopped positions.

A
C

ATKF231E

- Optical sensor : Provides tail gate velocity and


position information
- Drive unit clutch : Transmit motor power to push ATKF231C

rod through pinion gear.


4. PTG CHIME (D)
2. POWER LATCH When a power operation cannot be performed as re-
Power latch is located in the lower part of tail gate quested or an obstacle has been detected.
panel. When tail gate located latching position, cinch-
ing motor (A) has a cinch electrically. And unlatch mo-
tor (B) unlatch the latch electrically when receive the
open signal. D

ATKF231D
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -159

5. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (A) OPERATION E03EC7DD

POWER TAIL GATE OPEN/CLOSE

1. The power tail gate is opened and closed automati-


cally if the main switch (A) is pressed on the overhead
console.
A

A B

PWR

ATKF231M

Push the power tail gate (A) of the remote keyless en-
try more than 0.5s to open the power tail gate. Power
Open operation shall be reversed when an additional
Open/Close signal is received during power opening.
ATKF231J

6. OPERATING ORDER
Switch ON → clutch on → motor operation → pinion 2. When the power ON/OFF button (PWR) (B) is ON, the
gear rotation → rack rectilinear motion → push rod power sliding door and power tailgate can be opened
motion → tail gate open/close and closed automatically by using the switch.

3. When the power tail gate door will power open/close


fully, the warning lamp and the chime will operate 3
times.

4. General rules for chime functions


- Chime & tail lamp shall operate prior to and dur-
ing power opening or closing the Tailgate : 3
Times (0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off), after 1 chime start
opening or closing with two chimes.
- Chime shall operate when a power operation
cannot be performed as requested except han-
dle pull : 1 Time (Duration 0.5 second on)
- Chime shall operate when an obstacle has been
detected : 3 Times (0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off)
- Chime shall operate if PTG has not reached pri-
mary latch position after a power cinch cycle : 3
Times (0.5 sec on, 0.5 sec off)
BE -160 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER TAIL GATE OPERATING CONDITION

1. The tail gate will not power open when vehicle is mov-
ing above 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gearshift lever is not
in P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

2. The power tail gate will not open with the transmitter or
the main control button when all power sliding doors
are locked and closed.

3. The power tail gate will detect the resistance, then


stop movement or move to the full open position to
allow the object to be cleared.

4. If the automatic stop and reversal feature operates


continuously more than twice during one opening or
closing operation, the power tail gate may stop at that
position. At this time, close the tailgate manually and
operate the tailgate automatically again.

5. The PTG system is an electronic device and requires


a minimum battery voltage to operate. The Elec-
tronic Control Unit (ECU) monitors the battery voltage
present at the ECU input battery input and will not per-
mit operation if the battery voltage is out of range.

6. If the PTG button is pressed during closing operation,


the power tail gate may reverse direction and open
fully.

7. Remove the accumulated snow or ice on the power


tail gate before operating.

NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the power sliding door and power tailgate at
open position for a long time.

WARNING
- Always disconnect the negative battery cable
before attempting any power tailgate system
service.
- Never attempt to enter or exit the vehicle with
the tailgate in motion. You could be injured
or cause damage to the power tailgate system
and or components.
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -161

POWER OPERATION The PTG system shall learn the position of each travel
extreme: full open and full closed.
The PTG system shall not open the Tailgate when the ve-
hicle is moving.
The PTG system shall operate through the full range of
Tailgate travel.

- : No action Close Open X : Stop


Operation
Vehicle Door Lock
Door Position Zone ON/OFF RKE Key PSD main PSD sub Door handle
Motion Status
fob Note 2 switch switch switch
OFF Any X
1 Unlock
ON
Locked X
OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X
2 Unlock X
ON
Locked X
Not
Moving OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X
3 or 4
ON Any X
OFF Any X X
Closing
ON Any X
ON Any X X X X
Opening 1 or 2
OFF Any X X X X
OFF Any X X
Opening 3 or 4
ON Any X
1 or 2 ON/OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X(Chime 1 T) X(Chime 1 T) X
OFF Any X(Chime 1 T) X
3 or 4
ON Any X

Moving
Closing ON Any X
OFF Any X X X X
Opening 1 or 2
ON Any X X X X
OFF Any X X
Opening 3 or 4
ON Any X
Any Any ON/OFF Any Manual Move
LTKG231F

1. Vehicle condition The Tailgate travel is divided into four zones starting at
Moving the full closed and latched position. Dimensions are at
- (IGN=OFF and Vehicle Speed > 5 km/h) or the bottom edge of the Tailgate and are approximate.
(IGN= ON and (Vehicle Speed > 5 km/h or Zone 1 : Power Latching - from primary to secondary
TRANS - not P/N)) latch (0 to 10 mm depending on latch travel).
Zone 2 : Between Secondary and Crossover Point
Not moving (Secondary to 20 degrees)
- (IGN=OFF and Vehicle Speed < 5 km/h) or Zone 3 : Between Crossover Point and Power Off (20
(IGN= ON and (Vehicle Speed < 5 km/h and degrees to 79 degrees)
TRANS - P/N)) Zone 4 : Power Off to Full Open - approximately 5
(15 counts from full open)
2. TAILGATE TRAVEL ZONES
BE -162 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ADJUSTMENT E9C8A782 POWER TAIL GATE DRIVE UNIT


POWER TAIL GATE INITIALIZATION
INSPECTION E7DBF2A8
POWER TAILGATE SYSTEM RESET
POWER TAILGATE MOTOR INSPECTION
Certain conditions may require that the PTG system be
reset. 1. Check the power tailgate motor by using the diagnos-
tic tool.
1. Remove the MEMORY fuse that provides logic power
to the PTGM. 2. Select a vehicle type and "BODY CONTROL MOD-
ULE(BCM)".
2. Wait 1 minute. Replace fuse. Initialize the PTGM.

INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
SEDONA 06-
The Power Tailgate system initialization must start from
the full closed or latched position. The Tailgate must be
powered Open once to fully initialize the system (Obstacle
detection shall be active during Tailgate initialization).

1. Manually close and latch the Tailgate.

2. Power the Tailgate open using the Open/Close switch,


outside handle or the remote control.
ALTERNATE METHOD

1. Remove the black connector (J2) from the PTGM.


BTKG312A

2. Wait a short time. Replace connector. Initialize


PTGM. 3. Select the "REAR AREA MODULE"

CAUTION SEDONA 06-


- The PTG system initialization must start from
the primary or secondary latched position.
- Obstacle detection shall be active during sys-
tem initialization.

BTKG312B
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -163

4. Select the "ACTUATION TEST" and "PTG 3. Select "POWER TAIL GATE".
OPEN/CLOSE" to operate tailgate motor.

SEDONA 06-

PTG OPEN/CLOSE

BTKG312E

LTKG312C
4. Select the sensor output. And then check the optical
5. If there is no working in actuator, change the drive sensor volt while operating power tailgate in power
unit. mode.

OPTICAL SENSOR INSPECTION

1. Check the power tailgate control module input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation
of tailgate control module is abnormal, replace power
tailgate drive unit.

2. When checking the optical sensor, select a vehicle


type and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG312F

5. Change the drive unit, if there is no change during


operation.

BTKG312D
BE -164 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DRIVE UNIT CLUTCH INSPECTION 4. Select the sensor output. And then check the clutch
feedback sensor output while operating power tailgate
1. Check the power tailgate control module input/output in power mode.
value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation
of tailgate control module is abnormal, replace power
tailgate drive unit.

2. To check the clutch operation, select a vehicle type


and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG312G

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. Change the drive unit, if there is no change during


BTKG312D operation.

3. Select power tailgate.

SEDONA 06-

BTKG312E
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -165

REPLACEMENT EAE5CBAD

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.


B
2. Remove the third, fourth seat (Refer to the Body group
- seat)

3. Remove the D pillar and luggage side trim (Refer to


the Body group - Interior trim).

4. Use a small screw driver to loosen clip (A). But do not


remove power tailgate push rod (B).

ATKF311L
A

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.

B NOTE
- Connect the connectors tightly.
- Check the power tail gate for normal operation
correctly.

WARNING
- A lost drive unit mounting bolt in the vehicle
ASKF007C may make a noise.
- Don’t operate the power tail gate when a push
5. Remove the power tail gate motor mounting bolts rod is removed.
(3EA) and connectors (4EA). And then remove the - A learn cycle must be performed whenever
power tail gate drive unit(A). the power is removed.
- Check the normal operating whenever a
TORQUE : 0.22 - 0.27 N.m (0.022 - 0.027 kg.m) power tailgate component is removed or
replaced. If the chime sound is heard, check
the DTC, wiring harness and cable connec-
tions.

ATKF311J

NOTE
PTG drive unit bracket connector (B) does not need
to be disconnected in this procedure.
BE -166 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER TAIL GATE MODULE 6. Installation is the reverse of removal

NOTE
REPLACEMENT E9EFA54C
- Connect the connectors tightly.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. - Check the power tail gate for normal operation
correctly.
2. Remove the third, fourth seat (Refer to the Body group
- seat) WARNING
3. Remove the D pillar and luggage side trim (Refer to - A lost drive unit mounting bolt in the vehicle
the Body group - Interior trim). may make a noise.
- Don’t operate the power tail gate when a push
4. Use a small screw driver to loosen clip (A). But do not rod is removed.
remove power tailgate push rod (B). - A learn cycle must be performed whenever
the power is removed.
- Check the normal operating whenever a
power tailgate component is removed or
A replaced. If the chime sound is heard, check
the DTC, wiring harness and cable connec-
tions.
B

ASKF007C

5. Remove the power tail gate module mounting bolts


(2EA) and connectors (2EA). And then remove the
power tail gate module (A).

TORQUE: 0.025 - 0.035 N.m (0.0025 - 0.0035 kg.m)

ATKF312A
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -167

ANTI-PINCH STRIP 4. Select the sensor output. And then check the anti
pinch strip sensor output while operating power tail-
gate in power mode.
INSPECTION EEA7E524

1. Check the power tail gate control module input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation of
tailgate control module is abnormal, replace anti pinch
strip control module.

2. When checking the anti pinch strip operation, select


a vehicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE"
menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG312H

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. Change the anti pinch strip sensor, if there is no


change from OFF to ON during operation.

BTKG312D

3. Select "POWER TAILGATE".

SEDONA 06-

BTKG312E
BE -168 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT E8EAEF4D

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the tail gate trim (Refer to the Body group -


tail gate).

3. Remove the anti-pinch strip sensor connector (A).

ATKF314B

4. Remove the left and right side anti-pinch strip sensor


(B) after removing the screws (5EA).

ATKF314C

5. Installation is the reverse of removal. Part (C) has to


be assembled using the cloth.
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -169

POWER TAIL GATE POWER 4. Select the sensor output. And then check the cinch
LATCH feedback and unlatch feedback output while operating
power tailgate in power mode.

INPECTION E6CE075E

1. Check the power tail gate control module input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation
of tailgate control module is abnormal, replace power
latch.

2. To check the power latch operation, select a vehicle


type and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.

SEDONA 06-

LTKG312I

※ Above voltage and numerical value may be differ-


ent from the real value.

5. Change the anti pinch strip sensor, if there is no


change during operation.

BTKG312D

3. Select "POWER TAILGATE".

SEDONA 06-

BTKG312E
BE -170 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT EDFE7CCF 6. Remove the latch mounting screws (3EA) and cinch-
ing latch assembly (A) from the tail gate.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the tail gate trim (Refer to the Body group -


tail gate).

3. Remove the tail gate handle rod, actuator rod and key
rod.

4. Remove the unlatch actuator assembly (A) after re-


moving the connector and nuts (3EA).

ATKF315C

7. Installation is the reverse of removal.

NOTE
- Check the power tail gate for normal operation.
- Check the normal operating whenever a power
tailgate component is removed or replaced. If
the chime sound is heard, check the DTC, wiring
ATKF315D harness and cable connections.

5. Remove the tail gate handle rod (A) and connector (B)
from the cinching latch assembly (C).

A C
B

ATKF315B
POWER TAIL GATE SYSTEM BE -171

POWER TAIL GATE SWITCH 4. Check the PSD PTG power control switch and PTG
switch output value.

INSPECTION E5D35936

OVERHEAD CONSOLE DOOR SWITCH


INSPECTION

1. Check the overhead console door switch input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation of
overhead console door switch is abnormal, check the
IPM and replace.

2. When checking the overhead console switch opera-


tion, select a vehicle type and "IPM".

LTKG312L

5. Confirm that output is changed by the controlling


ON/OFF of each switch on the overhead console.

TAILGATE SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Check the power tailgate control module input/output


value by using the diagnostic tool. If the operation of
tailgate module is abnormal, replace power tailgate
switch.

2. When checking tailgate switch operation, select a ve-


LTKG312J hicle type and "POWER SLIDING/TAILGATE" menu.

3. Select a in panel module (IPM) and "02. CURRENT


DATA". SEDONA 06-

SEDONA 06-

BTKG312D

BTKG312K
BE -172 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Select the "POWER TAILGATE" menu to check. REPLACEMENT EF753D70

OVERHEAD CONSOLE SWITCH


SEDONA 06-
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Open the sunglass case cover from the overhead con-


sole then remove the 2 screws holding the overhead
console (A). And then disconnect the connector (B).

B A

BTKG312E

4. Select the sensor output. And then check the power


tailgate local switch output value changed by the con-
trolling PTG.

ATKF296G

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.

TAIL GATE SWITCH

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Open the tail gate and remove the tail gate trim switch
(A) using the appropriate trim tool. And then remove
the connector (B).

LTKG312M
A

5. If there is no input/output change from OFF to ON dur-


ing PTG operation, change the power tailgate switch.

ASKF007D

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


POWER DOOR MIRRORS BE -173

POWER DOOR MIRRORS


COMPONENT LOCATION E3FE3E0E

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

2*

1. Power door mirror 2. Mirror folding switch & Power door mirror switch(DDM)
BTKG300A
BE -174 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER DOOR MIRROR Terminal


1 2 3
ACTUATOR Position
UP
INSPECTION E1A7B6FC
DOWN
1. Remove the front door quadrant inner cover (A). Take OFF
care not to damage fixing clips. (Refer to the Body
LEFT
group - front door)
RIGHT
LTKG302C

A MIRROR HEATER

Terminal
Position 7 8
Heater
LTKG302D

MIRROR FOLDING

ATKF302A

2. Disconnect the power door mirror connector from the


harness.

3. Verify that the mirror operates properly as shown in


the table.
R2

R1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ETJA055B
7 8 9 10 11 12

Terminal
6 7
Direction
R1 M

R2 M

LTKG302E

ATKF302B
POWER DOOR MIRRORS BE -175

OUTSIDE MIRROR FOLDING 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SWITCH switch position according to the table.

Terminal
Class 9 7 10 12 8 11 6 2 5 4 3
REPLACEMENT E6ABCA07
Direction

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. UP

2. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body DOWN
group-front door)
LEFT
OFF
3. Remove the power window main switch mounting
screws (3EA) (A) after disconnecting the switch LEFT
connector (12pin) from the switch.
RIGHT

A UP

DOWN

RIGHT OFF

LEFT

RIGHT

Folding
Folding
Unfolding
ATKF301A
<Mirror & folding switch>
4. Remove the switch from the front door trim panel. LTKG301C

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSPECTION E71C132A

1. Disconnect the 12P connector from the switch.

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12

Mirror & folding switch

LTKG301B
BE -176 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER WINDOWS
COMPONENT LOCATION ECE84103

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

3*

1*

5
2*
8

9
7
4

1. IPM (In-Panel module) 6. Rear window motor


2. DDM (Driver door module) 7. Quarter glass motor
3. ADM (Assist door module) 8. Rear window switch
4. RAM (Rear area module) 9. Quarter glass switch
5. Front window motor
BTKG320A
POWER WINDOWS BE -177

POWER WINDOW MOTOR 3. Length of window reversing (holding the auto-up


switch)
- When detect the jamming during holding the
OPERATION EF0AEC57
auto-up switch.
→ Window is reversed until 20mm from jamming
FUNCTION OF SAFETY POWER WINDOW
position.
When driver door power window auto-up switch is oper-
ated, safety function is activated.

1. Safety function condition


When the system detects a force of 100N during the 20mm
window rising, window is reversed.

2. Length of window reversing (except when holding the


auto-up switch)
- When detect the jamming within 4mm ~ 300mm
from top of the door.
→ Window is reversed until 350mm from top of
the door.
When holding the auto-up switch

LTKG320D
300mm
Reverse turn
4. Safety function is not available area
Safety function is not available within 4mm from top
of the door.

INITIALIZING METHOD OF THE SAFETY POWER


WINDOW

1. Initializing of Battery Connection

When detect the jamming within 1) Power window operation before initializing
4mm~300mm from top of the door - Manual-Up/Down function is available
- Auto-Up function is not available
LTKG320B
(When holding the auto-up/down switch,
window is operated as a manual-up/down.)
- When detect the jamming over the 300mm from
top of the door.
2) Initializing method
→ Window is reversed until 50mm from jamming
Close the window in window open position, and
position.
holding the switch in window full close position
more than 1 second.

50mm
Reverse turn

When detect the jamming over the


250mm from top of the door

LTKG320C
BE -178 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REPLACEMENT E5FA284E 6. Installation is the reverse of removal.

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR QUARTER GLASS MOTOR

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal. 1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body 2. Remove the D pillar trim panel (A). (Refer to the Body
group-front door) group-interior trim)

3. Remove the window motor (B) after disconnecting the A


motor connector (A) and mounting nuts.

ATKF321C

3. Remove the quarter glass motor (B) after disconnect-


ATKF321A ing the motor connector (A) and quarter glass motor
mounting bolts and screws.
4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

SLIDING POWER WINDOW MOTOR

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the sliding door trim panel. (Refer to the B


Body group-rear door)

3. Remove the door trim seal and glass.

4. Remove the door regulator.

5. Remove the power window motor (A) after discon-


necting the motor connector and power window motor
mounting nuts. A

ATKF321D

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF321B
POWER WINDOWS BE -179

INSPECTION EA83D2B2 SLIDING POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION 1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the sliding door trim panel. (Refer to the
Body group-rear door)
2. Remove the rear door trim panel. (Refer to the Body
group-front door) 3. Disconnect the motor connector from the motor.

3. Disconnect the motor connector from the motor.

1 2

1 2

ATKF321F

BTKG321E 4. Connect the motor terminals directly to battery volt-


age and check that the motor operates smoothly.
4. Connect the motor terminals directly to battery Next, reverse the polarity and check that the motor
voltage (12V) and check that the motor operates operates smoothly in the reverse direction. If the
smoothly. Next, reverse the polarity and check that operation is abnormal, replace the motor.
the motor operates smoothly in the reverse direction.
If the operation is abnormal, replace the motor.
BE -180 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

QUARTER GLASS MOTOR INSPECTION

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the D pillar trim panel (A). (Refer to the Body


group-interior trim)

3. Disconnect the motor connector from the motor.

1 2

ATKF321G

4. Connect the motor terminals directly to battery volt-


age and check that the motor operates smoothly.
Next, reverse the polarity and check that the motor
operates smoothly in the reverse direction. If the
operation is abnormal, replace the motor.
POWER WINDOWS BE -181

POWER WINDOW SWITCH SLIDING POWER WINDOW SWITCH

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.


REPLACEMENT E1D5DA57

DRIVER/ASSIST DOOR MODULE (DDM/ADM) 2. Disconnect the connector (B) after removing the slid-
ing power window switch (A) from the B pillar trim (C).
1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.

2. Remove the front door trim panel. (Refer to the Body


group-front door)

3. Disconnect the door module mounting screws (5EA)


after disconnecting the module connectors (3EA)
from the motor.

A
B

ATKF332B

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.

A QUARTER GLASS SWITCH

1. Remove (-) negative battery terminal.


ATKF284A
2. Disconnect the connector (B) after removing the quar-
4. Remove the door module (DDM/ADM) (A) from the ter glass switch (A) from the rear cargo area luggage
front door trim panel. trim.

ATKF284B ATKF332C

5. Installation is the reverse of removal. 3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -182 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

WINDSHIELD DEICER communication line and then controls relay. Operating


condition is the same that of rear window defogger sys-
tem.
DESCRIPTION E6CDDCA9 With the engine running and the charging system operat-
ing, if the deicer switch is ON, then deicer output is ON for
Windshield deicer system prevent windshield wiper from 20 minutes.
freezing in the winter season. It consists of deicer in the
lower part of windshield, switch and relay. FAM receives
an input signal from the deicer switch of IPM through CAN COMPONENT LOCATION E5F42CBE

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

3
4*

1*
2

1. IPM (In-Panel module) 3. Windshield deicer


2. FAM (Front area module) 4. Deicer connector(2pin)
BTKG330A
WINDSHIELD DEICER BE -183

WINDSHIELD DEICER 4. Turn the ignition switch ON and the windshield deicer
switch ON, then measure the voltage between the ter-
minals of harness side deicer connector.
INSPECTION EDB1F4DF

O K: approx. Battery voltage (12V)


1. Remove the cowl top cover.(Refer to the wiper)

2. Disconnect the windshield deicer connector (A) from


the wiper motor linkage.

2 1

KTRE331A

3. Check for continuity between the terminals of deicer KTRE331C

lines.

1 2

KTRE331B
BE -184 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

WINDSHIELD DEICER SWITCH 4. Remove the windshield deicer switch from the center
facia panel switch.

INSPECTION EC7E1BFE

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the console lower cover (A). 0


L

ES
P

ATKF332E

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.


A

ATKF332A

3. Remove the center facia panel(A) after loosening


screws. Take care not to damage fixing clips.

ATKF332D
WINDSHIELD DEICER BE -185

WINDSHIELD DEICER TIMER

INSPECTION E3B5DC4E

While operating the components, check whether the oper-


ations are normal as shown in the timing chart.

1. Once Generator "L" is ON, if the defogger is switched


ON, the defogger will stay ON for 20 minutes duration.

2. If defogger switch is pressed again (see Step 1), or if


ignition is switched OFF, the defogger will shut OFF.

3. If Generator "L" is OFF, the defogger will shut OFF.

RUN
Ignition Sw
OFF, ACC, START
ON
Engine
Running
OFF
Windshield
ON
Defog Sw/
Rear Defog
OFF
Sw
OPEN
TG_Open
Sw Sts CLOSED
ON
Rear Defog 30 sec
Ctrl
OFF

Windshield ON
Defog Ctrl
OFF
Windshield ON
Defog Sw
Indicator/
OFF
Rear Defog
SwIndicator

LTKG146S
BE -186 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2. If a heater line is burned out between the center point
and (+) terminal, the voltmeter will indicate 12V.

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER


PRINTED HEATER
Burned out point

INSPECTION E89F53F8
+ -
CAUTION
Wrap tin foil around the end of the voltmeter test
12 Volts
lead to prevent damaging the heater line. Apply
finger pressure on the tin foil, moving the tin foil
along the grid line to check for open circuits.

ETA9165C
Finger pressure
Tester probe 3. If a heater line is burned out between the center point
and (-) terminal, the voltmeter will indicate 0V.

Burned out point


Tin foil
Printed
heater line + -

ETA9165A
0 Volts

1. Turn on the defogger switch and use a voltmeter to


measure the voltage of each heater line at the glass
center point. If a voltage of approximately 6V is in-
dicated by the voltmeter, the heater line of the rear
window is considered satisfactory.
ETA9165D

+ -

6 Volts (Normal)

ETA9165B
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BE -187

4. To check for open circuits, slowly move the test lead REPAIR OF BROKEN HEATER LINE
in the direction that the open circuit seems to ex-
ist. Try to find a point where a voltage is generated Prepare the following items:
or changes to 0V. The point where the voltage has
changed is the open-circuit point. 1. Conductive paint.

2. Paint thinner.
Voltage changes before and
after open circuited point
3. Masking tape.

4. Silicone remover.
Here is 0V voltage Terminal 5. Using a thin brush :
(-)
Wipe the glass adjacent to the broken heater line,
- clean with silicone remover and attach the masking
tape as shown. Shake the conductive paint container
well, and apply three coats with a brush at intervals of
about 15 minutes apart. Remove the tape and allow
sufficient time for drying before applying power. For a
better finish, scrape away excess deposits with a knife
after the paint has completely dried. (Allow 24 hours).
ETA9165E

5. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance of each


heater line between a terminal and the center of a grid
line, and between the same terminal and the center of
one adjacent heater line. The section with a broken
heater line will have a resistance twice as that in other
sections. In the affected section, move the test lead
to a position where the resistance sharply changes.

When measured from negative


terminal side (Section Masking tape
with no broken grid line)

(Section with broken grid ETA9165G


line) Center point

Positive
teminal
Tester B
reads resistance
twice as large as tester terminal

ETA9165F
BE -188 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 4. Disconnect the air control panel connector (A).
SWITCH

INSPECTION ECEFF2A5

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the center facia panel, console lower cover


and center air vent (A) after loosening screws. Take
care not to damage fixing clips.

ATKF342C

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF342A

3. Remove the center facia panel switch and air control


panel (A) after loosening screws.

ATKF021F
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BE -189

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 2. Rear Defog Pause


TIMER When IPM receives tailgate flasher control CAN mes-
sage transition to tailgate flash value, rear defog is
inhibited for 30s.
INSPECTION E00409EA The 20 min rear defog timer is frozen during this
pause.
While operating the components, check whether the oper- If the user turns on rear defog function while this
ations are normal as shown in the timing chart. pause is going on, rear defog is set to ON only at the
end of the pause.
1. The defog function can be activated only when engine This pause has no impact on Rear Defog Switch illu-
is running and ignition key is in RUN position. mination.
If the defogger is switched ON, the defogger will stay When IPM receives tail gate open CAN message tran-
ON for 20 minutes duration. sition to OPEN value, this 30 s rear defog pause is
While Windshield Defog is on, the windshield defog also started, it works the same way as described
button is illuminated above.
If the switch is pushed again while defog is already
active, defog stops. IgnSwSts Charg VoltageCtrl
If the engine stops while defog is on, defog stops and
WindshieldDefogSwIndicator
it is not automatically turned on when the engine is Windshield Defog Sw
started again. Rear Defog Sw WindshieldDefogTimer
Rear defog works exactly in the same way as wind- FAM Windshield Defog On/
Off Check
shield defog using the Rear Defog Switch button as
input. IPM RearDefogTimer

RAM

RUN Rear Defog On/Off


Ignition Sw Check
OFF, ACC, START
ON ADM
Engine
Running
OFF
Windshield
ON
DDM
Defog Sw/
Rear Defog
OFF
Sw LTKG146T
OPEN
TG_Open
Sw Sts CLOSED
ON
Rear Defog 30 sec
Ctrl
OFF

Windshield ON
Defog Ctrl
OFF
Windshield ON
Defog Sw
Indicator/
OFF
Rear Defog
SwIndicator

LTKG146S
BE -190 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

WINDSHIELD WIPER/
WASHER
COMPONENT LOCATION E3A93DD1

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
7
RHD type is symmetrical.

2*

1*

5
3
4*

1. Windshield wiper arm & blade 5. Washer motor


2. Wiper & washer switch 6. Washer reservoir
3. Windshield washer hose 7. Rear washer hose
4. Windshield wiper motor & linkage
BTKG360A
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER BE -191

[RHD]
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH
B

REPLACEMENT E005EB53

A
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower shrouds
(A) after removing 3 screws.

ATKF031C

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF031B

2. Remove the wiper switch (A) by pushing the lock pin


(B) after disconnecting the connector.

[LHD]

ATKF031D
BE -192 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

INSPECTION EE84E01E WIPER SWITCH

Check for continuity between the terminals while operating (RHD)


the wiper and washer switch. If it is not normal condition, Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 14
replace wiper and wiper switch. (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (13) (14)
Position
[LHD] MIST

OFF

INT

LOW

HI
BTKG031I

WASHER SWITCH

(RHD)
Terminal
5(3) 7(1)
Position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OFF
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
ON
BTKG031J

ATKF031G

[RHD]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BTKG031N
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER BE -193

FRONT WIPER MOTOR

COMPONENT LOCATION EBFBDEAA

1. Wiper motor & linkage assembly 3. Cowl top cover


2. Wiper arm & blade 4. Cap
LTKG360B
BE -194 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REMOVAL E4134BE7

1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade after re-


moving the mounting nut (A).

TORQUE: 28~32 Nm (2.8~3.2 kgf.m, 20~23.1 lbf.ft)

A A

ATKF362C

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSPECTION EF37C437

SPEED OPERATION CHECK


ATKF362A
1. Remove the connector from the wiper motor.
2. Remove the weather strip and the cowl top cover (A)
after removing 4 fasteners. 2. Attach the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal
4 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.

A 3. Check that the motor operates at low speed.

4. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to ter-


minal 5 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.

5. Check that the motor operates at high speed.

ATKF362B

3. Remove the windshield wiper motor and linkage as-


sembly after removing 4 bolts. Disconnect the wiper
motor connector (A) and windshield deicer connector
(B) from the wiper motor & linkage assembly.

Torque: 7-11Nm (0.7-1.1, kgf.m, 5.0-7.9 lbf.ft)


1. Ground 4. Low
1 2 3 4 5
2. Parking 5. High
3. empty

LTKG362D
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER BE -195

INSTALLATION EFB56871

1. Install the wiper arm and blade to the specified posi-


tion.

Specified
A B
position
Distance[in 1.57+0.19/0 1.57+0.19/0
(mm)] (40+5/0) (40+5/0)

ATKF362E

2. Set the washer nozzle on the specified spray position.

547 404
256 247

107
346

356
492

362

319

474
415

240

Unit : mm

LTKG362G
BE -196 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FRONT WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION E3F4DC64

1. With the washer motor connected to the reservoir


REPLACEMENT EAFEC5E8
tank, fill the reservoir tank with water.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 2. Connect positive (+) battery cables to terminal 2 and
negative (-) battery cables to terminal 1 respectively.
2. Remove the front bumper cover. (Refer to Body group
- Front bumper) 3. Check that the motor operates normally and the
washer motor runs and water sprays from the front
3. Remove the washer hose, the washer motor connec- nozzles. If they are abnormal, replace the washer
tor (A) and washer level sensor connector (C). motor.
4. Remove the washer reservoir after removing 2 bolts
and 1 step bolt.

B
1 2
3
A

C [Front & Rear washer]


1. Ground
2. Windshield washer (+)
ATKF363A
3. Rear washer (+)

5. Installation is the reverse of removal. LTKG363B

Washer switch
Front
2

Rear
M
1

<Windshield & Rear washer motor>

LTKG245A
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER BE -197

RAIN SENSOR CONTACT INFLUENCE

The rain sensor can malfunction due to the following con-


DESCRIPTION EACED5FE ditions :
• Contamination of the measurement surface.
The Rain sensing windshield wiper system is a wiper sys- • Air bubbles between the windshield and the coupling
tem that, in addition to providing normal wiper functions off, pad contact surface.
mist, manual low speed, manual high speed, and wash, • The movement of coupling pad by vibration.
provides automatic control of automatic intermittent auto- • Damaged wiper blade.
matic low, and automatic high speeds.
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the rain sensor AUTO OPERATION
will be activated.
1. Operation Condition

Operation mode Operation condition


Switch AUTO is basic operation
RAIN SENSOR & UNIT condition that rain sensor perceives
dry windshield. From this condition,
Direct mode the rain sensor decides the
wiper operation mode depend
on the quantity and time of
measured rainwater
Operation pauses between 0.5 ~
Intermittent
5 seconds, then the wipers switch
mode
to intermittent mode
COVER
Low speed Operate continuously at low speed
LTKG280E
High speed Operate continuously at high speed

SYSTEM FUNCTION EEE053ED


2. Safety Function
BASIC PRINCIPLE - When there is an ice in the sensing field, the rain
sensor cannot recognize the correct working con-
Emitted Beam from luminosity diode is reflected entirely dition.
against the windshield exterior, and then turn into photo
diode. NOTE
If there is water on the windshield exterior, beam seperates
Do not operate the rain sensing wipers unless the
optically, and the degree of remained beam is measured
windshield is completely clear of ice and snow.
in the photo diode.
What there is water in the windshield, it means beam is - Glass damage : rain sensor cannot perceive the
not reflected all, so the degree of lost beam indicates the damaged windshield within the sensing field.
degree of glass surface wet. - The rain senson will not operate properly if de-
tached from the windsheld.
NOTE - If the wiper ECU does not transmit any effective
Rainsensor consist of two luminosity diode, two photo data in 5 seconds, the rain sensor turns off LED.
diode, optic fiber and coupling pad. - If the intermittent wiper signal is interrupted for >2
sec, the wipers are moved to the parking position.
OPERATION CONTROL - If a rain sensor signal communication error lasts
for > 5sec, the wipers are moved into the parking
Wiper ECU transmits the signal as a rainsesor, and then position.
the rainsensor perceives the rainwater to transmit to the - If the rain sensor transmits an error to the wiper
wiping order wiper ECU, wiper ECU controls the wiper mo- ECU, the wiper ECU stops the AUTO function
tor according to the signal. after 4.5 seconds.
BE -198 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REMOVAL EA219AA2 4. Rain sensor is fitted with 2 spring slides by clip type
on the front glass, it can be replaced easily. When
CAUTION replacing the front glass, take away the rain sensor
from the existing glass.
The rain sensor may not operate proprly if con- After then attach it to new one again.
taminated. Protect the rain sensor surface by not
removing the cover until installation time. The
coupling pad on the rain sensor surface has adhe- INSPECTION E8F283B7

sive strength. Take care when installing the sen-


sor. If the sensor is separated from the windshield 1. Wiper blade
by force, the sensor or windshield may be dam- Check the wear of wiper blade. If it is excessively
aged. Take care when removing the sensor. worn, wipe out clean to sense the rain amount accu-
rately.
1. Remove the sensor cover. When removing it, make
sure take care to prevent damage. To remove it, press 2. Coupler
back the locking hook using the cover hole using an Ensure the coupler surface on the windshield is free of
appropriate tool. bubbles. Verify that the coupler is properly positioned.

3. Glass
Check the windshield glass surface beyond the sens-
A ing range for the excessive wear, scratch or crack.
Although the sensor compensates for wear to a cer-
tain level, sensor fails to sense accurately if it excceds
a certain level. This is confirmed by the self-diagnosis
of sensor.

4. Exterior cover
Ensure the exterior cover of the rain sensor is properly
installed.

5. Spring clip
Check the spring clip after removal of exterior cover if
B
the rain sensor is disconnected from coupler.
ATKF365B

6. Connector
2. When removing rain sensor from the bracket, open
the spring clip using the (-)driver, and then remove. 1) Check the terminal inside the connector and
wiring for compression, and check the terminal
whether it is inserted and locked correctly.

2) In addition, check the wiring connector and rain


A sensor connector for assembly and confirm to
prevent poor connection

ATKF365C

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the


sensor.
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER BE -199

INSTALLATION EFBCBDB2

NOTE
• In case of the windshield with reflection layer
which reflects the infrared rays in sensing field,
remove the reflection layer from the rain sensor
mounting position prior to installation.
• Bracket and spring slide need for installing the
rainsensor, it is covered by sensor cover.

1. Install the rain sensor bracket to the windshield glass


using the tape

Bracket

Tape

Windshield glass

ETZE015I

2. Rain sensor Installation


The two springs should be closed simultaneously.
Once closed, press the housing forward to ensure
proper adhesion of the sensor to the windshield.

Spring
Slide

Rain sensor
Bracket

Windshield

ETZE015K

3. Connect the rain sensor connector, and then install


the sensor cover.

CAUTION
It is very important that the coupling pad pushes
against the windshield completely to prevent bub-
bles from forming at the contact surface.
BE -200 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

4. Disconnect the rear wiper motor connector (A) then


REAR WIPER/WASHER remove the rear wiper motor (B) after removing 2
bolts.
REAR WIPER MOTOR Tightening torque Nut :
7~11 Nm (0.7~1.1 kgf.m, 5.1~8.0lbf.ft)
REMOVAL EEA39DEC

A
1. Remove the tail gate trim (Refer to the Body group - B
Tail gate).

2. Detach the wiper cap (A), and then remove the rear
wiper arm after removing the mounting nut (B).

Tightening torque Nut(B) :


10~13 Nm (1.0~1.3 kgf.m, 7.2~9.4 lbf.ft)

B
ATKF381D

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.

INSPECTION E48C25CB

1. Remove the 3P connector from the rear wiper motor.

2. Connect battery positive (+) and negative (-) cables to


terminals 2 and 1 respectively.
ATJF381A
3. Check that the motor operates normally. Replace the
motor if it operates abnormally.
3. Detach the wiper motor cover, and then remove the
rear wiper cap & pad (B) after removing the mounting
nut (A).

NOTE
During installation, of the rear wiper cap and pad, en-
sure the arrow on the cap assembly is pointed up-
wards.

A
B

1. Ground 3. Parking
1 2 3 2. Switch

LTKG381E

ATJF381B
REAR WIPER/WASHER BE -201

INSTALLATION E5D3C358

1. Install the rear wiper arm and blade to the specified


position.
※ Specified position : The first defogger line from
bottom of the rear window.

2. Set the rear washer nozzle on the specified spray po-


sition.

190
77
89

133
202

Unit : mm

LTKG381F
BE -202 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

REAR WASHER SWITCH REAR WIPER & WASHER SWITCH

(RHD)
INSPECTION EDB7B549
Terminal
9(9) 10(10) 11(11) 12(12)
With the rear wiper & washer switch in each position, Position
make sure that continuity exists between the terminals be-
Rear washer
low. If continuity is not as specified, replace the multifunc-
tion switch. OFF
[LHD] INT

ON

Rear washer
BTKG031K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14

ATKF031G

[RHD]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14

BTKG031N
REAR WIPER/WASHER BE -203

REAR WASHER MOTOR

INSPECTION EA1FCBFB

1. With the washer motor connected to the reservoir


tank, fill the reservoir tank with water.

2. Remove the front bumper. (Refer to the Body group-


Front bumper)

3. Connect positive (+) and negative (-) battery cables to


terminals 3 and 1 respectively to see that the washer
motor runs and water is pumped.

4. Check that the motor operates normally.


Replace the motor if it operates abnormally.

1 2
3

[Front & Rear washer]


1. Ground
2. Windshield washer (+)
3. Rear washer (+)

LTKG363B

Washer switch

Front
2

Rear
M
1

<Windshield & Rear washer motor>

LTKG245A
BE -204 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ELECTROCHROMIC INSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR
DESCRIPTION EEDAF7F3

The electrochromatic rear view mirror detects the ambient


light using a built-in sensor and adjusts the reflectability of
the mirror to prevent excess light (such as the light emit-
ted by a following vehicle’s headlights) from reaching the
driver’s eyes during night driving. To allow for maximum
Status indicator LED Rear light sensor
vision while backing up, the electrochromatic functionality
of the mirror is deactivated whenever the transaxle is in ’R’ Feature control button
range.
ETBF410B

Front light sensor

1. IGN (12V)
1 2 3 2. Reverse gear signal ETBF410C
3. Ground

INSPECTION E1EB2F7B

ETRF410A
Check it by the procedure below to see if the function of
1. The front sensor sees if the brightness of the sur- the ECM is normal.
roundings is low enough for the mirror to operate its
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
function.
2. Cover the front sensor to stop functioning.
2. The rearward looking sensor detects glaring of the
reflecting light from a following vehicle. 3. Shine a light at the rear sensor.
3. The ECM is darkened to the level as determined by 4. The ECM should be darkened as soon as the rear
the rearward looking sensor. When the glaring is no sensor detects the light.
longer detected, the mirror stops functioning.

NOTE
If this test is performed in daytime, the mirror may be
darkened as soon as the looking sensor is covered.

5. When the reverse gear is engaged, the ECM should


not be darkened.
ELECTROCHROMIC INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR BE -205

REPLACEMENT EBC7EFEF

1. Push the inside rear view mirror base down to remove


the inside rear view mirror assembly (A) after remov-
ing the mirror wire cover.

KTBF410D

NOTE
Take care not to damage the mounting bracket during
removal.

Spring

ETRF410D

2. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -206 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SEAT
COMPONENT LOCATION ED58445D

1. Slide motor 3. Rear height motor


2. Front height motor 4. Reclining motor
LTKG440A
POWER SEAT BE -207

POWER SEAT MOTOR SLIDE MOTOR

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.


REPLACEMENT EC6537BD

2. Remove the seat cushion (Refer to Body group - front


FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR seat).

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. 3. Remove the slide motor (A) after removing the mount-
ing bolt (2EA) and connector.
2. Remove the seat cushion (Refer to Body group - front
seat). A

3. Remove the front height motor (A) after loosening the


mounting nuts (2EA) , bolt (1EA) and removing con-
nector.

ATKF421G

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

SLIDE MOTOR

ATKF421F 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

4. Installation is the reverse of removal. 2. Remove the seat cushion (Refer to Body group - front
seat).
REAR HEIGHT MOTOR
3. Remove the slide motor (A) after removing the mount-
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. ing bolts (2EA) and connector.
2. Remove the seat cushion (Refer to Body group - front
seat).

3. Remove the rear height motor (A) after removing the


mounting bolt (2EA) and connector.

ATKF421C

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF421F

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -208 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

RECLINING MOTOR INSPECTION E9B33E1F

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. SLIDE MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH

2. Remove the seat back (Refer to Body group - front 1. Disconnect the limit switch and operate the limit
seat). switch.

3. Remove the seat shaft fixing clip (A) and seat shaft 2. Check for continuity between the terminals.
(B).
3. Make sure that the seat operation is normal in the
reverse after the maximum operation.

4. If operation is not correct, replace the limit switch.

ATKF421D

4. Remove the relining motor (A) after removing the


mounting nut (1EA) and connector.
1
2 3
A

ATKF421A

Terminal
Position 1 2 3

Front

Rear
LTKG421B

POWER SEAT MOTOR


ATKF421E
1. Disconnect the connectors for each motor.
5. Installation is the reverse of removal.
2. With the battery connected directly to the motor ter-
minals, check if the motors run smoothly.

3. Reverse the connections and check that the motor


turns in reverse.

4. If operation is not correct, replace the motors.


POWER SEAT BE -209

POWER SEAT SWITCH

REPLACEMENT ED17167D

1. Disconnect the nagative(-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the door trim panel (Refer to Body group -


front door).

3. Remove the switch connector (16pin) from the wiring


harness, And then loosen the mounting screws (3EA).

ATKF422A

4. Remove the switch from the front door panel.

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -210 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER SEAT MODULE (IMS


MODULE)

REPLACEMENT E47270E9

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the seat back (Refer to Body group - front


seat).

ATKF423A

3. Remove the power seat module after removing the


power seat module mounting nuts (4EA) and connec-
tor (3EA).

ATKF423B

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


SEAT WARMER BE -211

SEAT WARMER 4. Remove the seat warmer switch (A) from center facia
panel switch.

SEAT WARMER SWITCH

INSPECTION EADFDFD9

0
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. L
ES
P

2. Remove the seat back (Refer to Body group - front


seat).

ATKF441A

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF332A

3. Remove the mounting screw, center facia panel


switch and then disconnect connectors.

ATKF332D
BE -212 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SEAT WARMER 3. Operate the seat warmer after connecting the 3P con-
nector, and then check the thermostat by measuring
the temperature of seat surface. Check for continu-
INSPECTION E2FDC47C
ity between the terminals after disconnecting the 3P
connector.
1. Replacement of new part refer to Body group - front
seat. Standard value :
28 ±3.5 C(Continuity), 37 ±3.0 C(Short)
2. Check for continuity and measure the resistance be-
tween No.1 and NO.3 terminals.

1 2 3

ATKF441D

Standard value: 2.45Ω ± 10%


(Cushion: 1.2Ω ± 10%, Back: 1.2Ω ± 10%)

Cushion
-

Switch Thermostat

LTKG441C
SEAT WARMER BE -213

SEAT WARMER MODULE

REPLACEMENT E3D165C0

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the seat cushion (A) (Refer to Body group -


front seat)

ATKF443A

3. Remove the seat heater module (B) after removing


seat heater module mounting screw (2EA) and con-
nector from rear height motor (A).

ATKF443B

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -214 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SUNROOF
COMPONENT LOCATION EC2AA82E

2 1

1. Sunroof 3. Sunroof motor & controller


2. Sunroof switch
LTKG480A
SUNROOF BE -215

SUNROOF SWITCH Terminal


2 6 7 4
Position
INSPECTION EADDC4BB
SLIDE OPEN

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. CLOSE/DOWN

2. Remove the lens and open the sunglass case cover TILT UP
from the overhead console then remove the 2 screws LTKG481C

holding the overhead console. And disconnect the


connector then remove the overhead console lamp
assembly from the headliner.

B A

ATKF481A

3. Check for continuity between the terminals. If the con-


tinuity is not as specified, replace the sunroof switch.

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12

[Switch side connector]

LTKG481B
BE -216 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SUNROOF MOTOR RESETTING THE SUNROOF E2D24194

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or dis-


REPLACEMENT E165DD0F
charged, or you use the emergency handle to operate the
sunroof, you have to reset your sunroof system as follows
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. :
2. Remove the overhead console and loosen sunroof 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. Press and
motor bracket (A) mounting bolts (4EA). hold the TILT UP button more than 15s until the sun-
roof has tilted upward/downward slightly.

2. When this is complete, Press and hold the TILT UP


button once again until the sunroof has raised above
and returned to the maximum TILT UP position.
When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.
A

ATKF483A

3. Remove sunroof motor mounting screw (3EA) and


disconnect connector (10pin). And then remove the
sun roof motor.

KTBF071D
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -217

LIGHTING SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION EBAA54DE

Items Bulb Watt (W)


Head lamp (High) 55
Head lamp (Low) 55
Front turn signal lamp 28
Front position lamp 8
Front side marker lamp 5
Front fog lamp 35
Rear stop/tail lamp 21/5
Back up lamp 16
Rear turn signal lamp 27
Rear fog lamp 21
License plate lamp 5
Side repeater 5
Room lamp 10
Overhead console lamp 10 x 2
High mounted stop lamp LED
Glove box lamp 5
Luggage room lamp 5
Door courtesy lamp 5
BE -218 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION EAFF7B83

11

2
1
4

8
7
10

1. Head lamp(Low) 7. Tail/stop lamp


2. Head lamp(High) 8. Rear turn signal lamp
3. Front turn signal lamp/Position lamp 9. Back up lamp
4. Front fog lamp 10. License plate lamp
5. Side repeater 11. Room lamp
6. High mounted stop lamp
LTKG490A
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -219

HEAD LAMPS FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING

The front fog lamps should be aimed as the same manner


HEAD LAMP AIMING used to adjust the head lamps.
INSTRUCTIONS EE3EB08E
With the front fog lamps and battery normal condition, aim
Alternately turn the adjusting gear to adjust the head lamp the front fog lamps by turning the adjusting gear (A).
aiming. If beam-setting equipment is not available, pro-
ceed as follows :

1. Inflate the tires to the specified pressure and remove


any loads from the vehicle except the driver, spare
tire, and tools.

2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat floor.

3. Check the suspension spring.

4. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines passing through


respective head lamp centers) and a horizontal A
line (Horizontal line passing through center of head
lamps) on the screen.
ATKF491E
5. With the head lamp and battery in normal condition,
aim the head lamps so the brightest portion falls on
the horizontal and vertical lines.
Make vertical and horizontal adjustments to the lower
beam using the adjusting wheel.

Vertical adjustment

Horizontal adjustment

LTKG491D
BE -220 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HEAD LAMP AND FOG LAMP AIMING POINT

H1
H2
H3
W1
W2
W3

H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
L : Distance between the head lamp bulb center and screen

LTKG491F

Unit : mm
Vehicle condition H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 L
Without driver 28.3(719.5) 28.5(724.5) 14.4(366)
60.0(1,526) 50.3(1,278) 52.5(1,363) 118.1(3,000)
With driver 28.1(714.5) 28.3(719.5) 14.2(361)
LTKG491G
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -221

1. Turn the low beam on without the driver aboard.


The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable
range (shaded region).

[LHD]

Vertical line of the left Vertical line of the right


head lamp bulb center head lamp bulb center
CAR axis

Horizontal line of

1.181(30)
head lamp bulb center

1.771(45)
CUT-OFF LINE

H1
W1

Ground

Unit : in.(mm)
LTKG491K

[RHD]

Vertical line of the right Vertical line of the left


head lamp bulb center head lamp bulb center
CAR axis

Horizontal line of
1.181(30)

head lamp bulb center


1.771(45)

CUT-OFF LINE
H1

W1

Ground

Unit : in.(mm)
LTKG491L
BE -222 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.


The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable
range (shaded region)

Vertical of the left CAR axis


Vertical of the right
fog lamp bulb center fog lamp bulb center

Horizontal line of

2.36(60)
fog lamp bulb center
CUT-OFF

H3
W3

Ground

Unit : in.(mm)

LTKG491J
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -223

REPLACEMENT E41F6F66

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Loose the mounting bolts (2EA).

LTKG491C

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.

ATKF491A

3. Remove the head lamp assembly after disconnecting


the lamp connectors.

NOTE
Take care that holding clip (A) is not to be damaged.

ATKF491B

4. Remove the head lamp rear cover and pulling up head


lamp bulb fixing wire clip.
BE -224 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TURN SIGNAL LAMP REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.


REPLACEMENT EC9AE408

2. Remove the rear lamp assembly (A) after removing


FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP the mounting screw (3EA) and connector.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove front lamp assembly. A

3. Remove the socket in a counterclockwise direction.

A
ATKF491L

3. Remove the socket in a counterclockwise direction


and replace the bulbs.

ATKF491P

4. Replace the bulb (A).

ATKF491M
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -225

SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Disconnect the connector after removing the lens.

3. Remove the socket in a counterclockwise direction.

ATKF491Q

4. Replace the bulb.


BE -226 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ROOM LAMP

REPLACEMENT E5300E2E

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Detach the lamp lens from the room lamp with a flat-tip
screwdriver (-) then replace the bulb.

ATKF491K

3. Pull the bulb down and replace it with a new one.

NOTE
Take care that holding clip (A) is not to be damaged.

4. Installation is the reverse of removal.


LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -227

OVERHEAD CONSOLE LAMP

REPLACEMENT E5AFECC9

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Replace the bulb after removing the lens with a flat-tip


screwdriver.

ATKF491R

3. Remove the bulb and replace it with a new one

NOTE
Take care that holding clip (A) is not to be damaged
BE -228 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DOOR COURTESY LAMP

REPLACEMENT EF46AA34

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Replace the bulb (A) after removing the lens with a


flat-tip screwdriver.

[Front door]

LTKG491N

[Rear door]

LTKG491O

3. Remove the bulb and replace it with a new one.

NOTE
Take care that holding clip (A) is not to be damaged.
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -229

FRONT FOG LAMPS

REPLACEMENT EE9E1A7A

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the front lamp assembly.

3. Remove connector and the socket in a counterclock-


wise direction.

ATKF496A

4. Remove the bulb (A) and replace it with a new one.


BE -230 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

LICENSE LAMPS

REPLACEMENT EDC7C4C4

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the license plate lamp cover mounting screw


with a flat-tip screwdriver.

ATKF498A

3. Pull the bulb (B) down and replace it with a new one.
LIGHTING SYSTEM BE -231

STOP LAMPS

REPLACEMENT EEE71ACE

HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

1. Disconnect the nagative (-) battery terminal.

2. Open the tail gate and disconnect the high mounted


stop lamp mounting bolts (3EA). And then remove the
high mounted stop lamp(A).

ATKF499A

3. Installation is the reverse of removal.


BE -232 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AUTO LIGHTING CONTROL


SYSTEM
COMPONENT LOCATION E7CA1E10

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

3*

1. Auto light unit 3. Lighting switch (AUTO)


2. Head lamps 4. Tail lamps
BTKG510A

DESCRIPTION E6AA3D50 If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO" position, the
tail lamp and head lamp will be turned automatically on or
The auto light control system operates by using the auto off according to external illumination.
light switch.
AUTO LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM BE -233

AUTO LIGHT SWITCH (RHD)


Terminal
14(13) 15(14) 16(15) 17(16)
INSPECTION E3FBC25A Position

Check for continuity between terminal and terminal while OFF


operating the auto light switch. I
[LHD] II

AUTO
BTKG031E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

ATKF031E

[RHD]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

BTKG031G
BE -234 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AUTO LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT EBFAFFB9

Photo & auto light sensor inspection


INSPECTION E1FEB6B3

1. Disconnect the crash pad (Refer to Body group -


While operating the auto light switch, check if the opera- Crash pad).
tions are normal as shown in the timing chart.
2. Remove the Photo & auto light sensor (B) from crash
1. Auto light sensor value is always read at IGN ON. pad.

2. Light is turned ON after 1sec±0.1sec when auto light


sensor value is same as light ON input value.

3. Light is turned OFF after 2sec±0.2sec when sensor B


value is same as light OFF input value.

4. Tail lamp and head lamp are turned ON when sensor


value is same as tail lamp ON input value.

5. Light ON value of sensor is based on the below table.

6. Head lamp signal is output when head lamp switch is A


ON. After head lamp is turned OFF, head lamp signal
output is immediately stopped if head lamp OFF lumi-
nance condition is met at auto light switch ON.
ATKF202C
TAIL LAMP, AV HEAD LAMP
LAMP (low beam) 3. Installation is the reverse of removal.
0.63V+/-
ON 1.77V+/-0.08V
0.06V
1.02V+/-
OFF 3.47V+/-0.10V
0.06V

ON
AUTO SW OFF
TAIL ON SIG ON
OFF T1 T2

H/LAMP ON
ON SIG OFF
T2
T2
TAIL signal ON
output
OFF
T2 T1 T1
H/LAMP ON
signal output OFF

ETRF141X

T1 : 2 ± 0.2 sec
T2 : 2 ± 0.2 sec.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS BE -235

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS 4. If the daytime running light is not operated well, In-
spect the connector and terminals to be sure they are
all making good contact.
DRL CONTROL MODULE If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair
them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
INSPECTION EAD5E2BB

5. Make these input tests at the connector by using ETM.


1. The daytime running unit (A) is integrated in the IPM. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the
cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the IPM (In-panel mod-
ule) must be faulty; replace it.

ATKF140B

2. Functional diagram.

Park/Tail
Light MF lamp Sw FAM Head Lamps
switch Head lamp Low High Beam
Beam Sw
IPM

Park break Sw

Alternator L

LTKG147W

3. The DRL function operates the Head lamps High


Beam at 50% of full illumination. The DRL function
is active if :
- the engine is running
- the Head lamp multifunction switch is in OFF po-
sition or ’Park and Tail lamp’ (Auto light function
deactivated)
- The Park break switch is OFF.
When the DRL function is active, the Head lamps
High Beam can’t be turned ON, except for the
Flash To Pass activation.
LTKG740J
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HOT AT ALL TIMES HOT AT ALL TIMES


ENGINE PASSENGER
See Power COMPARTMENT
COMPARTMENT Distribution
ECU RLY JUNCTION JUNCTION
FUSIBLE BLOCK POWER BLOCK
LINK PHOTO 7 CONNECTOR.2 PHOTO 36
30A 15A
See Passenger
Compartment
Fuse Details
ENGINE
CONTROL 11 I/P-D
RELAY
See Power 0.5G
Distribution
SNSR.1
FUSE
15A
7 M08-3
See MFI
Control System INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
70 JE01 IMMO. PHOTO 35
0.5L
2 EM21 PHOTO 29
0.5L
2 M45 0.5L
1 4 M72 10 M08-2
DOOR SMATRA
Transponder Antenna Memory power
ANTENNA WARNING (IMMOBILIZER)
COIL SWITCH PHOTO 40
PHOTO 40 0.3R
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL

Antenna(-) Ground PCM


2 3 5 M72
1 M45 0.5Gr 0.5B 0.5G
23 4 EM21 PHOTO 29
0.5G 0.5R
22 6 JE01
E6DEF3DF

ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
JUNCTION
BLOCK
PHOTO 7
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
24 3 JC01
0.5L 0.5O
75 69 C44
PCM
Immo. Immo.

SYSTEM
Data line IND. PHOTO 22
PHOTO 57 G20
BE -236
BE -237

LTKG740L
C44
94 93 92 91 90 89 87 86 85 84 83 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73
72 71 70 69
* 82
51
6 5
48 47
* 67 66 65 64
42
63 62
41 40
61
39
60
38
59
37
58
36
57
35
56
34
55
33
* 53 52
30 29
4 3
* 27*
28 26 25
* 23
24
* 22* 21
* 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
* *9
10 8 7 2 1
AMP_PCU_94F_B
M08-2 M08-3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 BLANK
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 12 11 10 9 8 7
*
AMP_040M2_16F_B AMP_040M2_12F_B
M45 M72
1 2 1 BLANK BLANK
3 4 5 6 5 4 3 2
KET_090II_06M_W KUM_CDR_05F_W
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM
BE -238 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DIAGNOSIS OF IMMOBILIZER - Data (stored in the PCM(ECM) related to the immobi-


lizer function.
FAULTS EB6F9949
The following table shows the assignment of immobilizer
- Communication between the PCM(ECM) and the
related faults to each type:
SMARTRA.
- Function of the SMARTRA and the transponder.

Immobilizer Related Faults Fault types Diagnostic codes


1. Transponder not in password mode. P1674
Transponder key fault
2. Transponder transport data has been changed. (Transponder status error)
1. Corrupted data from transponder P1675
Transponder key fault 2. More than one transponder in the magnetic (Transponder programming
field (Antenna coil) error)
P1676
SMARTRA fault 1. Invalid message from SMARTRA to PCM(ECM).
(SMARTRA message error)
1. No response from SMARTRA P1690
SMARTRA fault
(Communication Line Error - Open or Short etc.) (SMARTRA no response)
P1691
Antenna coil fault 1. Antenna coil open/short circuit
(Antenna coil error)
Immobilizer indicator P1692
1. Immobilizer indicator lamp error (cluster)
lamp fault (Immobilizer lamp error)
1. Corrupted data from transponder P1693
Transponder key fault 2. More than one transponder in the magnetic (Transponder no response
field (Antenna coil) error/invalid response)

INSPECTION CHART FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES(DTC)

DTC Description Page


P1674 TRANSPONDER STATUS ERROR BE - 249
P1675 TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING ERROP BE - 252
P1676 SMARTRA MESSAGE ERROR BE - 255
P1690 SMATRA NO RESPONSE BE - 258
P1691 ANTENNA COIL ERROR BE - 264
P1692 IMMOBILIZER LAMP ERROR BE - 267
TRANSPONDER NO RESPONSE ERROR/
P1693 BE - 271
INVALID RESPONSE
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -239

DESCRIPTION E51091D4 TEACHING PROCEDURES E269BF9A

The immobilizer system will disable the vehicle unless the 1. Key Teaching Procedure
proper ignition key is used, in addition to the currently avail- Key teaching must be done after replacing an inoper-
able anti-theft systems such as car alarms, the immobilizer ative PCM(ECM) or when providing additional keys to
system aims to drastically reduce the rate of auto theft. the vehicle owner.

1. SMARTRA type immobilizer The procedure starts with an PCM(ECM) request


- The SMARTRA system consists of a transpon- for vehicle specific data (PIN code: 6digits) from the
der located in the ignition key, an antenna coil, tester. The "virgin" PCM(ECM) stores the vehicle
a SMARTRA unit, an indicator light and the specific data and the key teaching can be started.
PCM(ECM). The "learnt" PCM(ECM) compares the vehicle spe-
- The SMARTRA communicates to the PCM(ECM) cific data from the tester with the stored data. If the
(Engine Control Module) via a dedicated com- data are correct, the teaching can proceed.
munications line. Since the vehicle engine man-
agement system is able to control engine mobi- If incorrect vehicle specific data have been sent to
lization, it is the most suitable unit to control the the PCM(ECM) three times, the PCM(ECM) will reject
SMARTRA. the request of key teaching for one hour. This time
- When the key is inserted in the ignition and cannot be reduced by disconnecting the battery or any
turned to the ON position, the antenna coil other manipulation. After reconnecting the battery,
sends power to the transponder in the ignition the timer starts again for one hour.
key. The transponder then sends a coded
signal back through the SMARTRA unit to the The key teaching is done by ignition on with the key
PCM(ECM). and additional tester commands. The PCM(ECM)
- If the proper key has been used, the PCM(ECM) stores the relevant data in the EEPROM and in
will energize the fuel supply system. The immo- the transponder. Then the PCM(ECM) runs the
bilizer indicator light in the cluster will simultane- authentication required for confirmation of the teach-
ously come on for more than five seconds, in- ing process. The successful programming is then
dicating that the SMARTRA unit has recognized confirmed by a message to the tester.
the code sent by the transponder.
- If the wrong key has been used and the code was If the key is already known to the PCM(ECM) from a
not received or recognized by the PCM(ECM) the previous teaching, the authentication will be accepted
indicator light will continue blinking for about five and the EEPROM data are updated. There is no
seconds until the ignition switch is turned OFF. changed transponder content (this is impossible for
- If it is necessary to rewrite the PCM(ECM) to a learnt transponder).
learn a new key, the dealer needs the customer’s
vehicle, all its keys and the Scan tool (pro) The attempt to repeatedly teach a key, which has
equipped with an immobilizer program card. Any been taught already during the same teaching cycle,
key that is not learned during rewriting will no is recognized by the PCM(ECM). This rejects the key
longer start the engine. and a message is sent to the tester.
- The immobilizer system can store up to four key
codes. The PCM(ECM) rejects invalid keys, which are pre-
- If the customer has lost his key, and cannot start sented for teaching. A message is sent to the tester.
the engine, contact motor service station. The key can be invalid due to faults in the transponder
or other reasons, which result from unsuccessful pro-
Antenna coil unit gramming of data. If the PCM(ECM) detects different
authenticators of a transponder and an PCM(ECM),
PCM(ECM)
the key is considered to be invalid.
SMARTRA
(FUEL SUPPLY
UNIT
SYSTEM) The maximum number of taught keys is 4

If an error occurs during the Immobilizer Service


Key cylinder Menu, the PCM(ECM) status remains unchanged
and a specific fault code is stored.
Ignition key
(Has built-in transponder)

LTIF740B
BE -240 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

If the PCM(ECM) status and the key status do not 1) PCM(ECM) learnt status.
match for teaching of keys, the tester procedure will
be stopped and a specific fault code will be stored at 1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS
PCM(ECM).
MODEL : SEDONA 06
01. ENGINE
Connect the Scan tool (Pro)
02. AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
03. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
04. SRS-AIRBAG
05. ELEC. CONTROL SUSPENSION
Insert new 1st key and turn IG. ON
06. IMMOBILIZER
07. ELEC. POWER STEERING
Enter the key teaching mode
08. FULL AUTO AIR/CON.
Input PIN code(6 digits) BTKG741A
(Remain minimum 3 seconds after input)

1st key is registered 1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS

MODEL : SEDONA 06
Remove 1st key
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER

01. CURRENT DATA


02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
Insert new 2nd key and turn IG. ON
(Remain minimum 3 seconds)
03. TEACHING
04. NEUTRAL MODE
2nd key is registered 05. LIMP HOME MODE

Remove 2nd key


BTKG741B

1.3 TEACHING
Insert new 3rd key and turn IG. ON
(Remain minimum 3 seconds)
MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
3rd key is registered
STATUS : LEARNT

Remove 3rd key


INPUT PIN OF SIX
FIGURE AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY

Insert new 4th key and turn IG. ON CODE : 234567


(Remain minimum 3 seconds)

4th key is registered BTKG741C

Remove 4th key

Sequence completed

LTIF740M
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -241

1.3 TEACHING 1.3 TEACHING

MODEL : SEDONA 06 MODEL : SEDONA 06


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT STATUS : LEARNT

1st KEY TEACHING 2st KEY TEACHING


ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N] COMPLETED

CODE : 234567 CODE : 234567

BTKG741D BTKG741G

1.3 TEACHING 2) PCM(ECM) virgin status.


After replacing new "PCM(ECM)" scantool dis-
MODEL : SEDONA 06 plays that PCM(ECM) is virgin status in Key
Teaching mode.
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
"VIRGIN" status means that PCM(ECM) has not
STATUS : LEARNT
matched any PIN code before.

1st KEY TEACHING 1.3 TEACHING


COMPLETED
MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
CODE : 234567
STATUS : VIRGIN

BTKG741E INPUT PIN OF SIX


FIGURE AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY
1.3 TEACHING

MODEL : SEDONA 06 CODE : 234567


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT
BTKG741H

2st KEY TEACHING 1.3 TEACHING


ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N]
MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
CODE : 234567
STATUS : VIRGIN

BTKG741F 1st KEY TEACHING


ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N]

CODE : 234567

BTKG741I
BE -242 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. User Password Teaching Procedure


1.3 TEACHING
The user password for limp home is taught at the ser-
vice station. The owner of the vehicle can select a
MODEL : SEDONA 06
number with four digits.
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : VIRGIN User password teaching is only accepted by a "learnt"
PCM(ECM). Before first teaching of user password to
1st KEY TEACHING an PCM(ECM), the status of the password is "virgin"
No limp home function is possible.
COMPLETED
The teaching is started by ignition on, with a valid
CODE : 234567 key and sending the user password by tester. After
successful teaching, the status of the user password
changes from "virgin" to "learnt"
BTKG741J
The learnt user password can also be changed. This
1.3 TEACHING can be done if the user password status is "learnt"
and the tester sends authorization of access, either
MODEL : SEDONA 06 the old user password or the vehicle specific data.
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER After correct authorization, the PCM(ECM) requests
STATUS : VIRGIN the new user password. The status remains "learnt"
and the new user password will be valid for the next
limp home mode.
2st KEY TEACHING
ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N] If incorrect user passwords or wrong vehicle specific
data have been sent to the PCM(ECM) three times,
the PCM(ECM) will reject the request to change the
CODE : 234567 password for one hour. This time cannot be reduced
by disconnecting the battery or any other actions. Af-
ter reconnecting the battery, the timer starts again for
BTKG741K
one hour.

1.3 TEACHING 1) User password teaching

MODEL : SEDONA 06 1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : VIRGIN MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
2st KEY TEACHING
01. CURRENT DATA
COMPLETED
02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
03. TEACHING
CODE : 234567 04. NEUTRAL MODE
05. LIMP HOME MODE
BTKG741L

BTKG741M
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -243

1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING 1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING

MODEL : SEDONA 06 MODEL : SEDONA 06


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : VIRGIN STATUS : VIRGIN

INPUT NEW PASSWORD OF FOUR COMPLETED


FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY PRESS [ESC] TO EXIT

NEW PASSWORD : NEW PASSWORD : 2345

BTKG741N BTKG741Q

1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING ※ If the wrong password is entered, wait 10 sec-


onds, then start again from step 1.
MODEL : SEDONA 06
2) User password changing
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : VIRGIN
1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS

INPUT NEW PASSWORD OF FOUR MODEL : SEDONA 06


FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER

01. CURRENT DATA


NEW PASSWORD : 2345
02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
03. TEACHING
BTKG741O 04. NEUTRAL MODE
05. LIMP HOME MODE
1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING

MODEL : SEDONA 06
BTKG741M
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : VIRGIN
1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING

ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N] MODEL : SEDONA 06


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT
NEW PASSWORD : 2345
INPUT OLD PASSWORD OF FOUR
FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY
BTKG741P

OLD PASSWORD :

BTKG741R
BE -244 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING 1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING

MODEL : SEDONA 06 MODEL : SEDONA 06


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT STATUS : LEARNT

INPUT OLD PASSWORD OF FOUR COMPLETED


FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY PRESS [ESC] TO EXIT

OLD PASSWORD : 2345 NEW PASSWORD : 1234

BTKG741S BTKG741V

1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING COMPONENTS OPERATIONS E58F3B6B

MODEL : SEDONA 06 PCM (POWER TRAIN CONTROL MODULE)


SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT 1. The PCM(ECM) carries out a check of the ignition
key using a special encryption algorithm, which is
programmed into the transponder as well as the
INPUT NEW PASSWORD OF FOUR PCM(ECM) simultaneously. Only if the results are
FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY equal, the engine can be started. The data of all
transponders, which are valid for the vehicle, are
stored in the PCM(ECM).
NEW PASSWORD : 1234

BTKG741T

1.2 PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING

MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT

ARE YOU SURE ? [Y/N] PCM

NEW PASSWORD : 1234 ATKF781D

BTKG741U
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -245

SMARTRA UNIT ANTENNA COIL

The SMARTRA carries out communication with the built-in The antenna coil (A) has the following functions.
transponder in the ignition key. This wireless communica- - The antenna coil supplies energy to the transponder.
tion runs on RF (Radio frequency of 125 kHz). The SMAR- - The antenna coil receives signal from the transpon-
TRA is mounted behind of the crush pad under panel close der.
to the antenna coil for RF transmission and receiving. - The antenna coil sends transponder signal to the
The RF signal from the transponder, received by the an- SMARTRA.
tenna coil, is converted into messages for serial commu- It is located directly in front of the steering handle lock.
nication by the SMARTRA device. And, the received mes-
sages from the PCM(ECM) are converted into an RF sig-
nal, which is transmitted to the transponder by the an-
tenna.
The SMARTRA does not carry out the validity check of
the transponder or the calculation of encryption algorithm.
This device is only an advanced interface, which converts
the RF data flow of the transponder into serial communi-
cation to the PCM(ECM) and vice versa.

ATKF781B

ATKF781C

TRANSPONDER (BUILT-IN KEYS)

The transponder has an advanced encryption algorithm.


During the key teaching procedure, the transponder will
be programmed with vehicle specific data. The vehicle
specific data are written into the transponder memory. The
write procedure is once only; therefore, the contents of the
transponder can never be modified or changed.

ATKF781A
BE -246 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

LIMP HOME FUNCTION E46FD0F6


1.5 LIMP HOME MODE
1. LIMP HOME BY TESTER
MODEL : SEDONA 06
If the PCM(ECM) detects the fault of the SMARTRA
or transponder, the PCM(ECM) will allow limp home SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
function of the immobilizer. Limp home is only pos-
sible if the user password (4 digits) has been given
to the PCM(ECM) before. This password can be se- INPUT PASSWORD OF FOUR
lected by the vehicle owner and is programmed at the
FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY
service station.
The user password can be sent to the PCM(ECM) via
the special tester menu. NEW PASSWORD : 2345
Only if the PCM(ECM) is in status "learnt" and the user
password status is "learnt" and the user password is
correct, the PCM(ECM) will be unlocked for a period of BTKG741Y
time (30 sec.). The engine can only be started during
this time. After the time has elapsed, engine start is 1.5 LIMP HOME MODE
not possible.
If the wrong user password is sent, the PCM(ECM) MODEL : SEDONA 06
will reject the request of limp home for one hour. Dis- SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
connecting the battery or any other action cannot re-
duce this time. After connecting the battery to the
PCM(ECM), the timer starts again for one hour.
COMPLETED
1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS PRESS [ESC] TO EXIT

MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER

01. CURRENT DATA BTKG741Z


02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
03. TEACHING
04. NEUTRAL MODE
05. LIMP HOME MODE

BTKG741W

1.5 LIMP HOME MODE

MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER

INPUT PASSWORD OF FOUR


FIGURES AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY

PASSWORD :

BTKG741X
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -247

2. LIMP HOME BY IGNITION KEY of time (30 sec.). The engine can be started during
The limp home can be activated also by the igni- this time. After the time has elapsed, engine start is
tion key. The user password can be input to the not possible. After a new password has been input,
PCM(ECM) by a special sequence of ignition on/off. the timer (30 sec.) will start again.
Only if the PCM(ECM) is in status "learnt" and the user After ignition off, the PCM(ECM) is locked if the timer
password status is "learnt" and the user password is has elapsed 8 seconds. For the next start, the input
correct, the PCM(ECM) will be unlocked for a period of the user password is requested again.

NOTE :

T1 > 5sec
3sec < T2 < 10sec
0.2sec < T3 < 5 sec
0.2sec < T4 < 3sec
T5 = 5sec
T6 < 30sec
T9 = 8sec
T8 = 30sec
CODE "0" = IG.ON 10 TIMES

LTJF740N
BE -248 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

PROBLEMS AND REPLACEMENT 2. Things to remember before a replacement (Keys &


Additional registration)
PARTS: ED6A33D1

Scan tool Replace keys & additional registration


Problem Part set
required?
All keys have
Blank key (4) YES
been lost
Turn the key to the IG ON position
Antenna coil unit
Antenna coil unit NO
does not work
Initialize the PCM(ECM) (Under the Neutral Mode)
PCM(ECM)
PCM(ECM) YES
does not work
Insert the key you want to register and
Ignition switch turn it to the IG ON position
Ignition switch
with Antenna YES
does not work
coil unit
Register the key (Under the Teaching Mode)
Unidentified
vehicle specific Key, PCM(ECM) YES
Register additional keys (Maximum of 4 keys)
data occurs All phases of key registration should be
SMARTRA unit completed in under 10 seconds
SMARTRA unit NO
does not work
Registration completed
REPLACEMENT OF PCM(ECM) AND SMARTRA
ETRF746B

In case of an inoperative PCM(ECM), the unit has to be


replaced with a "virgin" or "neutral" PCM(ECM). All keys NOTE
have to be taught to the new PCM(ECM). Keys, which 1. When there is only one key registered and you
are not taught to the PCM(ECM), are invalid for the new wish to register another key, you need to re-reg-
PCM(ECM) (Refer to key teaching procedure). The ve- ister the key which was already registered.
hicle specific data have to be left unchanged due to the 2. When the key #1 is registered and master key #2
unique programming of transponder. is not registered, Put the key #1 in the IG/ON or
In case of an inoperative SMARTRA, there is no special the start position and remove it. The engine can
procedure required. A new SMARTRA device simply re- be started with the unregistered key #2.
places the old one. There are no transponder-related data (Note that key #2 must be used within 10 seconds
stored in this device. of removing key #1)
3. When the key #1 is registered and key #2 is not
1. Things to remember before replacing (PCM(ECM))
registered, put the unregistered master key #2 in
the IG/ON or the start position.
When installing PCM(ECM) of car "A" on car "B"
All non-virgin PCM(ECM's) need to be neutralized before
The engine cannot be started even with the reg-
installing on the other vehicles. istered key #1.
4. When you inspect the immobilizer system, refer
to the above paragraphs 1, 2 and 3.
Neutralize the PCM(ECM) of car "A" Always remember the 10 seconds zone.
5. If the pin code & password are entered incor-
Installing the PCM(ECM) of car "A" on car "B"
rectly on three consecutive inputs, the system will
be locked for one hour.
6. Be cautious not to overlap the transponder areas.
Register the keys with the PIN code of car "B" 7. Problems can occur at key registration or vehicle
starting if the transponders should overlap.

Register additional keys (Maximum of keys)


All phases of key registration should be
completed in under 10 seconds

Registration completed

ETRF746A
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -249

NEUTRALIING OF PCM(ECM)
1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS
The PCM(ECM) can be set to the "neutral" status by a
MODEL : SEDONA 06
tester.
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
A valid ignition key is inserted and after ignition on is
recorded, the PCM(ECM) requests the vehicle specific 01. CURRENT DATA
data from the tester. The communication messages are 02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
described at "Neutral Mode" After successfully receiving 03. TEACHING
the data, the PCM(ECM) is neutralized. 04. NEUTRAL MODE
05. LIMP HOME MODE
The PCM(ECM) remains locked. Neither the limp home
mode nor the "twice ignition on" function, is accepted by
the PCM(ECM).
BTKG745A
The teaching of keys follows the procedure described
for the virgin PCM(ECM). The vehicle specific data have 1.4 NEUTRAL MODE
to be unchanged due to the unique programming of the
transponder. If data should be changed, new keys with a MODEL : SEDONA 06
virgin transponder are requested.
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
STATUS : LEARNT
This function is for neutralizing the PCM(ECM) and Key.
Ex) when lost key, Neutralize the PCM(ECM) then teach
keys. INPUT PIN OF SIX
(Refer to the Things to do when Key & PIN Code the FIGURE AND PRESS [ENTER] KEY
PCM(ECM) can be set to the "neutral" status by a scan-
ner. A valid ignition key is inserted and after ignition on
is recorded, the PCM(ECM) requests the vehicle specific CODE : 234567
data from the scanner. The communication messages are
described at" Neutral Mode". After successfully receiving
the data, the PCM(ECM) is neutralized. BTKG745E

The PCM(ECM) remains locked. Neither the limp home


mode nor the "twice ignition on" function is accepted by 1.4 NEUTRAL MODE
PCM(ECM).
The teaching of keys follows the procedure described for MODEL : SEDONA 06
virgin PCM(ECM). The vehicle specific data have to be un- SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER
changed due to the unique programming of transponder. STATUS : NEUTRAL
If data should be changed, new keys with virgin transpon-
der are requested.
COMPLETED
NOTE PRESS [ESC] TO EXIT

• Neutralizing setting condition


- In case of PCM(ECM) status "Learnt" re-
gardless of user password "Virgin or Learnt"
- Input correct PIN code by scanner.
- Neutralizing meaning . BTKG745B

: PIN code (6) & user password (4) deletion.


: Locking of PCM(ECM) (except key teaching
permission)
BE -250 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1. KIA VEHICLE DIAGNOSIS

MODEL : SEDONA 06
SYSTEM : IMMOBILIZER

01. CURRENT DATA


02. PASSWORD TEACHING/CHANGING
03. TEACHING
04. NEUTRAL MODE
05. LIMP HOME MODE

BTKG745C

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 0


02. ECU STATUS NEUTRAL
03. KEY STATUS NOT CHECK

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


LTKG745D
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -251

DTC P1674 TRANSPONDER STATUS ERROR

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E59E204F

During the key teaching procedure the transponder will be programmed with vehicle specific data. The vehicle specific
data are written into the transponder memory. The write procedure is unique; therefore the content of transponder can
never be modified or changed. The data are a string of 9 bytes defined by vehicle manufacturer.
The transponder memory is split into two strings called authenticator and key password After this programming the
transponder memory is locked and the data(PIN code) cannot be read or changed respectively. The transponder status
changes from "virgin" to "learnt". Additionally every transponder includes a unique IDE (Identifier number) of 32 bit.
Unique means that the IDE of all transponder is different from each other. The IDE is programmed by the transponder
manufacturer and is a read-only value. The authenticator and the key password are not transferred from PCM(ECM)
to transponder or vice versa. Only the results from the encryption algorithm are transferred. It is almost impossible to
calculate the vehicle specific data from the encryption result.
For teaching of keys and special purposes the PCM(ECM) is connected to the tester device.

When IG is ON, the coil supplies energy to the transponder which in turn accumulates energy in the condenser.
Once the energy supply from the coil has stopped, using the stored energy in the condenser, the transponder transmits
the ID CODE (stored within the ASIC).

DTC DESCRIPTION E71ABDF2

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1674 if transponder key that can’t be register(TP not in the password mode or whose transport
data has been changed) is inserted for registration procedure.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION EBE5DBBF

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Invalid transponder.
※ Key not in ’VIRGIN’ Status
• IG ON (On Registering TP
Enable Conditions or with invalid ID code.
Procedure)
Threshold value
Detecting time
FAIL SAFE
BE -252 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

MONITOR DTC STATUS EB5EF74D

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC).

2. Ignition "ON" & engine "OFF"

3. Selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)"mode and monitor "DTC Status" parameter

4. Is the DTC B1674 present?

YES

Go to "Inspection & Repair" procedure

NO

Fault is intermittent caused by poor contact in SMARTRA’s and/or PCM(ECM’s) connector or was repaired and
PCM(ECM) memory was not cleared. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corro-
sion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle
Repair" procedure.

COMPONENT INSPECTION EE40B2F3

1. Check transponder status

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF" with key intended to register

2) Monitor the "KEY STATUS" Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’VIRGIN’ or ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA 1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1 01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT 02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS NOT CHECK 03. KEY STATUS INVALID

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP
Fig 1

Fig 1) The current data in abnormal state


LTKG742C
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -253

3) Is the measured value within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Substitute with a known-good transponder and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace transponder and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EBCC234A

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


BE -254 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DTC P1675 TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING ERROR

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E6B8E757

During the key teaching procedure the transponder will be programmed with vehicle specific data. The vehicle specific
data are written into the transponder memory. The write procedure is unique; therefore the content of transponder can
never be modified or changed. The data are a string of 9 bytes defined by vehicle manufacturer.
The transponder memory is split into two strings called authenticator and key password After this programming the
transponder memory is locked and the data(PIN code) cannot be read or changed respectively. The transponder status
changes from "virgin" to "learnt". Additionally every transponder includes a unique IDE (Identifier number) of 32 bit.
Unique means that the IDE of all transponder is different from each other. The IDE is programmed by the transponder
manufacturer and is a read-only value. The authenticator and the key password are not transferred from PCM(ECM)
to transponder or vice versa. Only the results from the encryption algorithm are transferred. It is almost impossible to
calculate the vehicle specific data from the encryption result.
For teaching of keys and special purposes the PCM(ECM) is connected to the tester device.

When IG is ON, the coil supplies energy to the transponder which in turn accumulates energy in the condenser.
Once the energy supply from the coil has stopped, using the stored energy in the condenser, the transponder transmits
the ID CODE (stored within the ASIC).

DTC DESCRIPTION ECDE95F7

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1675 if characteristic data of transponder doesn’t coincide with that of PCM(ECM) owing to
transponder programming error.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E5A9A6CC

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Invalid transponder.
※ Invalid characteristic data.
Enable Conditions • IG ON
※ No transponder or more than
Threshold value two transponder is detected
Detecting time by coil antenna

FAIL SAFE

MONITOR DTC STATUS EFD2A684

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC).

2. Ignition "ON" & engine "OFF"

3. Selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)"mode and monitor "DTC Status" parameter

4. Is the DTC B1675 present?

YES

Go to "Inspection & Repair" procedure

NO

Fault is intermittent caused by poor contact in SMARTRA’s and/or PCM(ECM’s) connector or was repaired and
PCM(ECM) memory was not cleared. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corro-
sion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle
Repair" procedure.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -255

COMPONENT INSPECTION E4EABC8E

1. Check transponder and ECU status

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF" with key intended to register

2) Monitor the "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS LEARNT

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


Fig 1
LTKG742D

Fig1) The current data in normal state

3) Is the measured value within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Check transponder" procedure.

2. Check transponder

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Neutralize PCM(ECM) and Register transponder key by scantool.

NOTE
Pin code is requied to Neutralize PCM(ECM) and to Register transponder key
BE -256 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3) Are Neutralizing and Registering completed normally?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Substitute with a known-good transponder and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace transponder and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EBAFA7B6

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -257

DTC P1676 SMARTRA MESSAGE ERROR

GENERAL DESCRIPTION EA7C63D7

The SMARTRA carries out communication with the built-in transponder of the ignition key. This wireless communication
runs on RF (Radio frequency of 125 kHz). The SMARTRA is mounted at the ignition lock close to the antenna coil for RF
transmission and receiving. The RF signal from the transponder received by the antenna coil is converted into messages
for serial communication by the SMARTRA device. And the received messages from the PCM(ECM) are converted into
an RF signal, which is transmitted to the transponder by the antenna. The SMARTRA does not carry out the validity check
of transponder or the calculation of encryption algorithm. This device is only an advanced interface, which converts the
RF data flow of the transponder into serial communication to PCM(ECM) and vice versa.

* SMARTRA : SMARt TRansponder Antenna

DTC DESCRIPTION E65EABF0

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1676 if there’s any fault in message from SMARTRA to ECU.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E6A35E4E

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Faulty SMARTRA
Enable Conditions • IG ON
Threshold value
Detecting time
FAIL SAFE

MONITOR DTC STATUS E5D5DBD4

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC).

2. Ignition "ON" & engine "OFF"

3. Selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)"mode and monitor "DTC Status" parameter

4. Is the DTC B1675 present?

YES

Go to "Inspection & Repair" procedure

NO

Fault is intermittent caused by poor contact in SMARTRA’s and/or PCM(ECM’s) connector or was repaired and
PCM(ECM) memory was not cleared. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corro-
sion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle
Repair" procedure.
BE -258 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

COMPONENT INSPECTION E31EDB8F

1. Check transponder and ECU status

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF" with key intended to register

2) Monitor the "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS LEARNT

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


Fig 1
LTKG742D

Fig1) The current data in normal state

3) Are "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Check SMARTRA" procedure.

2. Check SMARTRA

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Neutralize PCM(ECM) and Register transponder key by scantool.

NOTE
Pin code is requied to Neutralize PCM(ECM) and to Register transponder key
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -259

3) Are Neutralizing and Registering completed normally?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Substitute with a known-good SMARTRA and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace SMARTRA and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR E4FFD635

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


BE -260 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DTC P1690 SMARTRA NO RESPONSE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E2BAA8B0

The SMARTRA carries out communication with the built-in transponder of the ignition key. This wireless communication
runs on RF (Radio frequency of 125 kHz). The SMARTRA is mounted at the ignition lock close to the antenna coil for RF
transmission and receiving. The RF signal from the transponder received by the antenna coil is converted into messages
for serial communication by the SMARTRA device. And the received messages from the PCM(ECM) are converted into
an RF signal, which is transmitted to the transponder by the antenna. The SMARTRA does not carry out the validity check
of transponder or the calculation of encryption algorithm. This device is only an advanced interface, which converts the
RF data flow of the transponder into serial communication to PCM(ECM) and vice versa.

* SMARTRA : SMARt TRansponder Antenna

DTC DESCRIPTION E0144A06

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1690 if there’s No Response from SMARTRA.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E94BDD8C

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Open Circuit in signal harness
• Short Circuit in signal harness
Enable Conditions • IG ON
• Faulty SMARTRA
Threshold value
Detecting time
FAIL SAFE

MONITOR DTC STATUS E2BCB01A

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC)

2. IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -261

3. Monitor the "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS LEARNT

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


Fig 1
LTKG742D

Fig1) The current data in normal state

4. Are "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Re-
pair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Inspection & Repair" procedure.

TERMINAL AND CONNECTOR INSPECTION EA4CF798

1. Many malfunctions in the electrical system are caused by poor harness and terminals.
Faults can also be caused by interference from other electrical systems, and mechanical or chemical damage.

2. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or
damage.

3. Has a problem been found?

YES

Repair as necessary and go to "Verification Vehicle Repair" procedure

NO

Go to "W/Harness Inspection" procedure.


BE -262 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION EB3EABC1

1. Check for open in harness

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Ignition "ON" & Engine "OFF"

4) Measure voltage value between terminal "4" of SMARTRA and chassis ground.

Specification : 9~16V

v
4. Power
1
5 4 3 2

LTKG742G

5) Is the measured voltage within specifications?

YES

Go to "Signal circuit Inspection" procedure

NO

Check for open or short in harness. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -263

SIGNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION EBFAE03B

1. Check for open in harness

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Measure resistance between terminal "5" of SMARTRA and terminal "45" of ECM

Specification : 1 Ω or less

1
5 4 3 2
5. Signal

20
* 18 17 16 15 * 33* 32* * * 299 288 277 266 255 4 233 2 211
40 39 38 37
*** ** * *
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
80 79 78
* 49 48 47 66
73 72 71 70 69 68
46 45 44 43 42 41

**** * * 64 63 62 61

LTKG742H

4) Is the measured resistance within specifications?

YES

Go to "Check for short in harness" procedure.

NO

Check for open in harness. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.
BE -264 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. Check for short in harness

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Ignition "ON" &amp; Engine "OFF"

4) Measure voltage value between terminal "5" of SMARTRA and chassis ground.

Specification :Approx. 5.48V

v
5. Signal

1
5 4 3 2

LTKG742I

5) Is the measured voltage within specifications?

YES

Go to "Signal circuit Inspection" procedure

NO

Check for short in harness. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -265

GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION ECA9B529

1. Check for open in ground harness

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Measure resistance between terminal "3" of SMARTRA and chassis ground.

Specification : 1 Ω or less

<M34>
1
5 4 3 2

3. Ground

LTKG742J

4) Is the measured resistance within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Check for open in harness. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EBDAC04F

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


BE -266 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DTC P1691 ANTENNA COIL ERROR

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ED035825

This wireless communication runs on RF (Radio frequency of 125 kHz). The SMARTRA is mounted at the ignition lock
close to the antenna coil for RF transmission and receiving. The RF signal from the transponder received by the antenna
coil is converted into messages for serial communication by the SMARTRA device. And the received messages from the
EMS are converted into an RF signal, which is transmitted, to the transponder by the antenna.

DTC DESCRIPTION EA1287A2

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1691 if there’s any fault in immobilizer antenna coil..

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E7E1311F

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Open Circuit in antenna coil
• Short Circuit in antenna coil
Enable Conditions • IG ON
• Faulty antenna coil
Threshold value
Detecting time
FAIL SAFE

MONITOR DTC STATUS E6C3D6F6

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC).

2. Ignition "ON" & engine "OFF"

3. Monitor the "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS LEARNT

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


Fig 1
LTKG742D

Fig1) The current data in normal state


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -267

4. Are "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Re-
pair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Inspection & Repair" procedure.

COMPONENT INSPECTION EA4BFA15

1. Check coil antenna.

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Monitor resistance between terminal "1" and "2" of SMARTRA.

Specification : Approx 8.5Ω

<M32-C>

1. Antenna coil(+)
1
5 4 3 2 Ω 2. Antenna coil(-)

LTKG742M

4) Is the measured resistance within specifications?

YES

Go to "Check SMARTRA" procedur.

NO

Check for open or short in antenna coil. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.
BE -268 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

2. Check SMARTRA

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Neutralize ECM and Register transponder key by scantool.

NOTE
Pin code is requied to Neutralize ECM and to Register transponder key

3) Are Neutralizing and Registering completed normally?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Substitute with a known-good SMARTRA and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace SMARTRA and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EAC14C4D

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -269

DTC P1692 IMMOBILIZER LAMP CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION EDEC530A

When driver inserts key and IGN "ON", Immobilizer informs status of system and result of Authentication by blinking of
immobilizer lamp on instrument cluster. through Authentication procedure immobilizer lamp keep lighting up till engine
starts. In normal status. Immobilizer lamp lights up for 30sec Right after ignition "ON". If there’s any fault in immobilizer
system or in Authentication, lamp blinks 5 times after ignition "ON".

DTC DESCRIPTION EEF77B2C

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1692 if there’s short circuit in immobilizer lamp circuit.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E7CEDDDD

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Short Circuit in immobilizer
lamp circuit
Enable Conditions • IG ON
• Open/Short in control harness
Threshold value • Faulty PCM(ECM)
Detecting time
FAIL SAFE

MONITOR DTC STATUS EDA7EDCF

1. Connect scantool to Data Link Connector(DLC).

2. Ignition "ON" & engine "OFF"

3. Selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)"mode and monitor "DTC Status" parameter

4. Is the DTC B1692 present.

YES

Go to "Inspection &amp; Repair" procedure

NO

Fault is intermittent caused by poor contact in SMARTRA’s and/or PCM(ECM’s) connector or was repaired and
PCM(ECM) memory was not cleared. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corro-
sion, contamination, deterioration, or damage. Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle
Repair" procedure.

TERMINAL AND CONNECTOR INSPECTION EF5DAF1D

1. Many malfunctions in the electrical system are caused by poor harness and terminals.
Faults can also be caused by interference from other electrical systems, and mechanical or chemical damage.

2. Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or
damage.
BE -270 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

3. Has a problem been found?

YES

Repair as necessary and go to "Verification Vehicle Repair" procedure

NO

Go to "W/Harness Inspection" procedure

CONTROL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ED3ABE52

1. Check for open in harness

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect SMARTRA.

3) Ignition "ON" & Engine "OFF"

4) Measure voltage value between terminal "72" of SMARTRA and chassis ground.

Specification : Approx. 11V

v
72. IMMO Lamp

20
* 18 17 16 15 * 33* 32* * * 299 288 277 266 255 4 233 2 211
40 39 38 37
*** ** * *
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
80 79 78
* 49 48 47 66
73 72 71 70 69 68
46 45 44 43 42 41

**** * * 64 63 62 61

LTKG742L

5) Is the measured voltage within specifications?

YES

Go to "Component Inspection" procedure

NO

Check for open or short in harness. Repair as necessary and go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -271

VISUAL/PHYSICAL INSPECTION E5CD2DE9

1. Check immobilizer lamp circuit.

1) Ignition "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Check if immobilizer lamp operates properly.

NOTE
Right after ignition "ON", Immobilizer lamp lights up for 30sec.
If lamp blinks 5 times after ignition "ON", there’s any fault in immobilizer system.

3) Is immobilizer lamp operates properly?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Component Inspection" procedure

COMPONENT INSPECTION EDE8EF1C

1. Check immobilizer lamp.

1) Ignition "OFF"

2) Disconnect PCM(ECM).

3) Ground terminal "C4" of immobilizer lamp.

4) Ignition "ON" and Monitor operation of immobilizer lamp.

Specification : Immobilizer lamp "ON"

<M32-C>

1. Antenna coil(+)
1
5 4 3 2 Ω 2. Antenna coil(-)

LTKG742M
BE -272 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

5) Is the Immobilizer lamp "ON"?

YES

Substitute with a known-good PCM(ECM) and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace PCM(ECM) and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NOTE
PCM(ECM) substitued for old one must be in "Virgin" or "Neutral" status and Pin code is requied to Neutralize
PCM(ECM) and to Register transponder key.

NO

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EABFEAD9

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -273

DTC P1693 TRANSPONDER NO RESPONSE ERROR / INVALID RESPONSE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION E39F1C58

During the key teaching procedure the transponder will be programmed with vehicle specific data. The vehicle specific
data are written into the transponder memory. The write procedure is unique; therefore the content of transponder can
never be modified or changed. The data are a string of 9 bytes defined by vehicle manufacturer.
The transponder memory is split into two strings called authenticator and key password After this programming the
transponder memory is locked and the data(PIN code) cannot be read or changed respectively. The transponder status
changes from "virgin" to "learnt". Additionally every transponder includes a unique IDE (Identifier number) of 32 bit.
Unique means that the IDE of all transponder is different from each other. The IDE is programmed by the transponder
manufacturer and is a read-only value. The authenticator and the key password are not transferred from PCM(ECM)
to transponder or vice versa. Only the results from the encryption algorithm are transferred. It is almost impossible to
calculate the vehicle specific data from the encryption result.
For teaching of keys and special purposes the PCM(ECM) is connected to the tester device.

When IG is ON, the coil supplies energy to the transponder which in turn accumulates energy in the condenser.
Once the energy supply from the coil has stopped, using the stored energy in the condenser, the transponder transmits
the ID CODE (stored within the ASIC).

DTC DESCRIPTION E0FA4F51

The PCM(ECM) sets DTC P1693 if there’s abnormal response from transponder.

DTC DETECTING CONDITION E790F51A

Item Detecting Condition Possible Cause


DTC Strategy • Corrupted data from Transponde
• More than one TP in the
Enable Conditions • IG ON
magnetic field
Threshold value • No TP(Key without TP) in the
Detecting time magnetic field

FAIL SAFE
BE -274 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

COMPONENT INSPECTION E5520D0E

1. Check transponder and ECU status

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Monitor the "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter on the Scantool.

Specification : ’LEARNT’

1.1 CURRENT DATA

01. NO. OF LEARNT KEY 1


02. ECU STATUS LEARNT
03. KEY STATUS LEARNT

FIX SCRN FULL PART GRPH HELP


Fig 1
LTKG742D

Fig1) The current data in normal state

3) Are "KEY STATUS" and "ECU STATUS’ Parameter within specifications?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Go to "Check transponder" procedure.


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -275

2. Check transponder

1) IGN "ON" & Engine "OFF"

2) Neutralize PCM(ECM) and Register transponder key by scantool.

NOTE
Pin code is requied to Neutralize PCM(ECM) and to Register transponder key

3) Are Neutralizing and Registering completed normally?

YES

Check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.
Repair or replace as necessary and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

NO

Substitute with a known-good transponder and check for proper operation.


If the problem is corrected, replace transponder and then go to "Verification of Vehicle Repair" procedure.

VERIFICATION OF VEHICLE REPAIR EEF32B7B

After a repair, it is essential to verify that the fault has been corrected.

1. Connect scantool and selet "Diagnostic Trouble Codes(DTCs)" mode and then clear DTC.

2. Operate the vehicle and monitor the DTC on the scantool

3. Are any DTCs present?

YES

Go to the applicable troubleshooting procedure

NO

System is performing to specification at this time.


BE -276 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT

REPLACEMENT ED4E6907

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A).

ATKF140A

3. Remove the steering column shaft (Refer to the ST


group).

4. Disconnect the 5P connector of the SMARTRA unit


and then remove the SMARTRA unit (A) after loosen-
ing the screw.

ATKF781C

5. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.


IMMOBILIZER CONTROL SYSTEM BE -277

COIL ANTENNA

REPLACEMENT E97CD4FF

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (A).

ATKF781B

5. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.

ATKF140A

3. Remove the cluster facia panel (B) after removing the


screws (A) (2EA) and trip switch connector.

ATKF261B

4. Disconnect the 6P connector of the coil antenna and


then remove the coil antenna (A) after loosening the
screw.
BE -278 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

TRIP COMPUTER When the remaining distance is below 30 miles


(50km), a blinking “ ----” symbol will be displayed.
The unit can be changed by press the reset button
TRIP COMPUTER for more than 4 sec. If the unit of distance to empty
is changed, the unit of average fuel consumption is
changed together.
DESCRIPTION E1E02CF8

The trip computer displays information related to driving,


including compass, distance to empty, elapsed time, av-
erage fuel consumption and outside temperature on the
display. To change the function as described below, push
the MODE button lesser than 2 sec. Distance to empty →
elapsed time → average fuel consumption → outside tem-
perature → OFF. Unit conversion

NOTE
Compass is always displayed except for OFF mode.

OPERATION E89B8EF4

LTKG751D
1. COMPASS
The vehicle compass displays the direction (8 direc- 3. ELAPSED TIME
tions) where the vehicle is heading. Compass is dis- This mode indicate the total time traveled since the
played when driving. last driving time reset while the engine is running.
Press the reset button for less than 4sec, clears the
driving time to zero.

ATKF751B

Reset
2. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty
based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the
amount of fuel delivered to the engine. The meter’ s
working range is from 30 to 1500 miles (50 to 1500
km) by the 1km or 1mile.

LTKG751E

ATKF751C
TRIP COMPUTER BE -279

4. AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION 5. OUTSIDE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE


This mode calculates the average fuel consumption This mode indicates the outside temperature around
from the total used fuel and the distance. The me- the vehicle form -40 C to 60 C (from -40 F to 140 F).
ter’s working range is from 0.0 to 99.9 L/100km or The unit can be changed by press the reset button for
MPG(mile per gallon). more than 4 sec.
Press the reset button for less than 4 sec, when the
average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears
the average fuel consumption to “ - -“ until the vehi-
cle is moved to 0.3 miles(500m).

Unit conversion

Reset

LTKG751H

LTKG751F

The unit can be changed by press the reset button


for more than 4 sec. If the unit of average fuel con-
sumption is changed, the unit of distance to empty is
changed together.

Unit conversion

LTKG751G
BE -280 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DISPLACEMENT EAECAACA ADUSTMENT EE42031C

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal. CORRECTION MODE

2. Remove the lens and open the sunglass case cover 1. The correction process is necessary for displaying
from the overhead console then remove the 2 screws correct direction of by removing the effect of magne-
holding the overhead console. And disconnect the tized car body components.
connector then remove the overhead console lamp
assembly from the headliner.
2. Push Mode button for 2 sec - 4.5 sec. And then "turn"
is displayed and "DIR" is blinking with 0.5 sec inter-
B A
vals.

Blinking

LTKG751I

ATKF481A 3. Automatic correction is done when the vehicle turns


720 in normal driving condition (the correction is in-
3. Remove the trip computer(A) mounting screws (3EA), visible to the driver).
and then disconnect from the overhead console.
NOTE
A - The correction data is updated if the automatic
correction data is better than the present correc-
tion data.
- Turning direction is not important.
- If the correction process is not finished after the
vehicle turns 720 , turn the vehicle some more
degree.

4. After finishing the correction process, the compass


displays the present direction.

5. If the correction process is not finished until 5 minutes


ATKF751A this mode is cancelled and the compass returns to
normal mode with restoring the previous correction
4. Installation is the reverse of removal. data.
TRIP COMPUTER BE -281

DECLINATION CORRECTION (VARIANT REGION


CHANGE MODE)

1. Change the "Declination Setting Value" according to


the regional declination to synchronize the true north
and vehicle’s north.

2. Push the mode button longer than 4.5 Sec to enter


the declination correction mode. (’DIR’ is on)

Declination correction mode

LTKG751K

3. Screen after 4.5 sec.

ATKF751L

4. Push the reset button longer than 0.1 Sec to change


the declination setting Value (Steps by 5 to East. Af-
ter East 30, wraps to West 30)

5. Push the mode button more than 1sec, new data is


stored on EEPROM and VFD displays normal direc-
tion.

6. Without any effective input for 30 seconds, the trip


computer displays the previous declination angle with
blinking for 2 sec and displays normal direction.

NOTE
1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc. that are at-
tached to the vehicle using a magnet as anything
attached to the roof of the vehicle with a magnet
will effect compass operation.
2. If the compass deviates from the correct indica-
tion soon after repeated adjustment, have the
compass checked at an authorized dealer.
3. The compass may not indicate the correct com-
pass point in tunnels or while driving up or down
a steep hill. (The compass returns to the cor-
rect compass point when the vehicle moves to
an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
- Declination correction and correction setting
value is not deleted during the B(+) OFF.
BE -282 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

BACK WARNING SYSTEM 2. DIAGNOSIS MODE


Switch on diagnosis mode upon system failure.
In case of system failure, then it indicates the failed
BACK WARNING CONTROL point as follows.
MODULE

DIAGNOSIS E4030E29 Diagnosis mode switch

OF
F
ON
1. DIAGNOSIS
Turn the ignition switch ON, then shift the transaxle
lever to ’R’. The Back Warning System is then
checked.
If no trouble, it generates buzzer alarm sound for 0.3
seconds after 0.5 seconds from power approval. In
case of system failure, buzzer alarm is generated 3
times continuously with the interval of 0.3 seconds.

LTJF976E
IGN ON

(1) Left side sensor failure buzzer


Transmission

Buzzer

Reception
(2) Rear left side sensor failure buzzer
Signal Noise Detect Signal

Normal condition Buzzer


buzzer
500ms 300ms
(3) Rear right side sensor failure buzzer

Sensor failure
buzzer Buzzer
300ms

(4) Right side sensor failure buzzer


LTKG760B

Buzzer

LTKG760C

SENSOR CONNECTION CHECKING

Transmit ultrasonic wave to the sensors, boost input signal,


and detect wave.
Waveform will be found, oscillating for a certain period of
time.
BACK WARNING SYSTEM BE -283

1. Waveform for a normal sensor connection

25-MAR-98
11 : 37 : 59
1
. 5 ms
2 . 00 v

1
2
. 5 ms
1 . 00 v
Oscillating period 1.2ms B
A : M1
50 ms
100 mv

A : M2
50 ms 2
100 mv

. 5 ms
1 .2 V DC
5 MS/s
2 .1 V DC 1 DC 1 . 68 + 0 . 80 V
STOPPED

BTKG230F

2. Waveform for a failed sensor connection

25-MAR-98
11 : 44 : 53
1
. 5 ms
5.0 v
1
2
. 5 ms
1 . 00 v

Oscillating period 0.5ms

. 5 ms
1 .5 V DC
5 MS/s
2 .1 V DC 1 DC 1 . 7 + 2.0 V
STOPPED

BTKG230G
BE -284 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NOTE
Sensor connection will be checked for oscillating pe-
riod of input signal 3V. If oscillating period is more than
0.8ms, it is normal.

a. Left sensor failure : beep-beep-beep


b. Right sensor failure : beep beep-beep
beep-beep beep
c. Rear-right sensor failure : beep beep beep-beep WALL
beep beep-beep beep beep
d. Right side sensor failure : beep beep beep beep-
beep beep beep beep-beep beep beep beep

WARNING
LT8C218B

1. Range detected by back sensors is limited.


Watch back before reversing 5. Reversing toward the sloped terrain.

2. There is a blind spot below the bumper. Low objects


(for example boundary barrier) may be detected from
minimum 1.5m away unable to detect at nearer.

3. Besides there are some materials unable to be de-


tected even in detection range as follows.

1) Needles, ropes, rods, or other thin objects.

2) Cotton, snow and other material absorbing ultra- SLOPE


sonic wave
(for example, fire extinguisher device covered
with snow)

LT8C218C
DISTANCE
approx. 1.2m 6. False alarm may operate in the following condition:
irregular road surface, gravel road, sloped road and
grass. Upon alarm generation by grass the alarm may
be generated by rock behind grass. Always visually
check the area behind the vehicle before backing up.
The sensors cannot discriminate between materials.
DEAD RANGE

7. Sensors may not operate correctly in the below con-


ditions.
Ensure sensors are clean from mud or dirt

1) When spraying the bumper, the sensor opening


is covered with something in order not to be con-
taminated. If sensor opening is contaminated
with mud, snow, or dirt, detection range will be
reduced and alarm may not be generated under
the crash condition. Dirt accumulated on the sen-
LT8C218A sor opening shall be removed with water.
Do not wipe or scrape sensor with a rod or a hard
4. Reversing toward the sloped walls. object.
BACK WARNING SYSTEM BE -285

2) If the sensor is frozen, alarm may not operate DESCRIPTION EC157B2C

until sensor thaws.


When reversing, the driver is not easy to find objects in
3) If a vehicle stays under extremely hot or cold en- the blind spots and to determine the distance from the ob-
vironment, the detection range may be reduced. ject. In order to provide the driver safety and convenience,
It will be restored at the normal temperature. back warning system will operate upon shifting to "R" Ultra-
sonic sensor will emit ultrasonic wave rearward and detect
4) When heavy cargo is loaded in rear cargo area, it the reflected wave. Control unit will calculate distance to
changes the vehicle balance, which reduces the the object using the sensor signal input and output buzzer
detection range. alarm in three steps (first, second and third alarm).
5) When other vehicle’s horn, motor cycle engine
noise, or other ultra-sonic wave sources are near.

6) Under heavy rain.

7) When reversing towards a vertical wall and the


gap between the vehicle and the wall is 15cm.
(Alarm may sound despite the absence of a bar-
rier)

8) If radio antenna is installed at the rear.

9) If the vehicle rear wiring is re-routed or electrical


component is added at the rear part.

10) Vehicle balance is changed due to the replace-


ment of the rear spring.

11) The unit will operate normally when the vehicle


speed is 5km/h or less.
Above this speed, the unit may not operate nor-
mally

8. Check the rear bumper for installation condition and


deformation. If installed improperly or the sensor ori-
entation is deviated, it may cause malfunction.

9. Be careful not to apply shock during sensor installa-


tion on the transmission or reception unit.

10. When adding electrical devices or modifying harness


at the rear body of the vehicle, ensure not to change
the transmission and reception unit wiring.
Tagging the transmission side and reception side, it
may cause malfunction.

11. High power radio transmitter (above 10W) may cause


malfunction. Do not install it on the vehicle.

12. Be careful that excessive heat or sharp objects shall


not touch ultrasonic sensor surface.
Do not cover the sensor opening or press the sensor.
BE -286 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION E8947BAD

The parts with asterisk(*) :


This illustration is shows the LHD type.
RHD type is symmetrical.

3*

1. Back warning control unit 3. Buzzer


2. Ultrasonic sensor
BTKG760A
BACK WARNING SYSTEM BE -287

REPLACEMENT EDE5BAEF
NOTE
1. Remove the right side trim of the trunk (Refer to the 1. Time tolerance of the above waveform : Time ±
Body group - "Interior trim") 10%
2. At nearer distance than 40cm, detection may not
2. Loosen the mounting bolts and remove the back occur.
warning control unit (A) from the quarter panel. 3. Alarm will be generated with vehicle reversing
speed 10km/h or less.
For moving target, maximum operation speed
shall be target approach speed of 10km/h.
4. When the vehicle or the target is moving, sequen-
tial alarm generation or effective alarm may be
A failed.
5. False alarm, or failure of the alarm to trigger may
occur in the following conditions.
- Irregular road surface, gravel road, reversing
toward grass.
- Horn, motor cycle engine noise, large vehi-
cle air brake, or other object generating ul-
trasonic wave is near.
- When a wireless transmitter is used near to
the sensor.
ATKF761A - Dirt on the sensor.
- Sequential alarm may not occur due to the
reversing speed or the target shape.
ALARM RANGE EDA7BF13

Upon detecting an object at each range out of 3 ranges


as stated below within the operation range, it will generate
alarm.
First alarm : Object comes near to the sensor located at
the rear of vehicle, within 81-120cm ± 15cm
Second alarm : Object comes near to the sensor located
at the rear of vehicle, within 41-80cm ± 10cm
Third alarm : Object comes near to the sensor located at
the rear of vehicle, within 40cm ± 10cm

First
50msec
ON
BUZZER
OFF
340ms

Second
50msec
ON
BUZZER
OFF
170ms

Third

ON
BUZZER Continuous sound
OFF

LTKG976C
BE -288 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ULTRASONIC SENSOR MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE

Back warning system (BWS) is a complementary device


OPERATION PRINCIPLE E374DBFD for reversing. BWS detects objects behind vehicle and
provides the driver with buzzer alarm finding objects in a
The sensor emits ultrasonic wave to the objects, and it certain area, using ultrasonic wave propagation speed and
measures the time until reflected wave returns, and cal- time.
culates the distance to the object. The propagation speed formula of ultrasonic wave in air is
following :
DISTANCE DETECTION TYPE

Direct detection type and indirect detection type are used v=331.5 + 0.6t (m/s)
together for improving effectiveness of the detection. v=ultrasonic wave propagation speed
t=ambient temperature
1. Direct detection type: One sensor transmits and re-
ceives signals to measure the distance. The basic principle of distance measurement using ultra-
sonic wave is :

Sensor Back up
Transmission lamp (12V)

Transmission
Object
Ultrasonic wave transmission frequency
Reception Reception

D = (T X V)/2[m] V = Ultrasonic wave speed [340m/s]


D = Distance to object T = Ultrasonic wave propagation time

ETRF762A
ETRF762C

2. Indirect detection type: One sensor transmits signals


and the other sensor receives the signals to measure
the distance.

Transmission
Sensor

Object

Sensor Reception

ETRF762B
BACK WARNING SYSTEM BE -289

SENSOR DETECTION RANGE

[Vertical range]

Third alarm Second alarm First alarm


40Cm 81~120 ± 15cm

41~80 ± 10cm

1. Distance tolerance(Messured at the front of sensor)


81~120cm : ±15cm
41~80cm : ±10cm
40cm : ±10Cm
2. Detection tolerance
At 40cm :45 ± 15
At 80cm : 30 ± 15
At 120cm : 20 ± 15
3. At nearer distance than 40cm detection may occur.
4. Measurement condition : Room temperature (20 ), 90mm diameter, 3m length rod.

Horizontal range

41~ 81~
40cm 80±10cm 120±15cm

third alarm Second First alarm


alarm

1. Distance tolerance(Messured at the front of sensor)


81~120cm : ±15cm
41~80cm : ±10cm
40cm : ±10cm
2. Detection tolerance
At 80cm : 90 ± 20
At 120cm : 10 ± 20
3. At nearer distance than 40Cm detection may occur.
4. Measurement condition : Room temperature (20 ), 90mm diameter, 3m length rod.

LTKG978A
BE -290 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NOTE
1. 14cm (Diameter) plastic rod is used for the test
target.
2. The test result may differ by a different target ob-
ject.
3. Detection range may be reduced by dirt accu-
mulated on sensor, and extremely hot or cold
weather.
4. The following object may not be detected.
- Sharp object or thin object like rope.
- Cotton, sponge, snow or other materials ab-
sorbing sonic wave.
- Smaller objects than 14cm (Diameter), 1m
length.

REPLACEMENT E7DBB46C

1. Remove the rear bumper ( Refer to the Body group -


"Rear bumper")

2. Disconnect the sensor connector at the inside of the


rear bumper (C), and then remove the sensor (B) from
the housing (A).

B A

LTJF762E

3. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.


BACK WARNING SYSTEM BE -291

BUZZER

INSPECTION EAC533EB

Test the buzzer by connecting battery voltage to terminal


1, and ground terminal 2.
The buzzer should make a sound. If the buzzer fails to
make a sound, replace it.

REPLACEMENT E9AABD82

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (Refer to the Body


group - crash pad).

ATKF140A

3. Remove the buzzer (A) after loosening the bolt and


disconnecting the connector from the left side of IPM.

KTRE763A

4. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.


BE -292 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION SWITCH

REPLACEMENT E44BAE40 A

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel (Refer to the Body


group - crash pad).

ATIE781A

5. Remove the door warning switch and key illumination


lamp (A) after loosening the screws (B) and discon-
necting the 6P connector.

ATKF140A

3. Remove the screws (2EA) and trip switch connector.


A
Then remove the crash facia panel (B).

ATKF781B

B
6. Remove the key lock cylinder (C) after pushing lock
pin (B) with key ACC.

ATKF261B

4. Remove the ignition switch (A) after loosening the C


screw with IG ON and disconnecting the 6P connec-
tor.

ATKF781E

7. Installation is the reverse of removal procedure.


MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION BE -293

MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION DIAGRAM E273A154

ADM

Diagnosis
CLUSTER

IPM IMS CAN Network

FAM

RAM

DDM

LTKG144F
BE -294 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DRIVER DOOR MODULE CONTROL FUNCTION E20CB0DB

POWER WINDOW CONTROL


DESCRIPTION E5760CA2

1. This switch controls power window up/down, auto-


The driver door module is a part of a Controller Area Net- matic up/down from driver & assist side.
work (CAN), and performs CAN communication with the - Driver’s power window switch sends input signal
BCM, FAM, IPM, RAM, ADM, and IMS. Driver controls through CAN communication by the manual
driver side power window switch button located inside of up/down and automatic up/down switch input.
the driver side door to operate power window, mirror, door At the same time passenger side sends manual
lock and unlock. up/down and automatic up/down signals to the
wires.
1. Two manual operations (up and down) for four p/win- - Each safety window ECU receives the signal
dows. However, on the driver’s seat the auto up/down and performs manual up/down and automatic
operation must be possible. up/down functions.

2. Opening and closing the quarter glass by the quarter 2. Power window lock
glass switch. When the driver’s power window lock switch is ON,
each safety window ECU receives the power window
3. Window UP/DOWN operation by RKE.
lock command to prohibit the operation by the pas-
4. Manually operating the mirror position by the manual senger side doors except the driver’s door.
switch (Up, Down, Right, and Left)
3. Timer function
5. Saving and replacing the mirror position by the MEM- Power window switch can be controlled for 30 sec-
ORY switch → For 2 persons onds after the ignition is turned off. This function stops
immediately even within 30 seconds if the front door
6. Saving and replacing the mirror position by RKE → is opened.
For 2 persons
KEY REMINDER
7. Out side mirror AUTO reverse operation
1. If door is locked by using door lock knob after opening
8. Out side mirror FOLD/UNFOLD power control door while IGN KEY is inserted to KEY CYLINDER,
Unlock output will be for 1sec and there will be a series
9. CENTRAL DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK function of three output signals every 0.5sec if door condition
is "Lock".
10. DOOR COURTESY LAMP control
2. If Key Reminder unlock message is "SHORT UN-
11. Out side mirror DEFOG control LOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 0.5sec.

12. Illumination control 3. If Key Reminder unlock message is "LONG UN-


LOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 1sec.

4. Remained action goes on though Key Reminder Un-


lock message changes to "OFF".

PRIORITY OF DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK

1. Crash Unlock > Auto Door Lock > Key Reminder >


Central Door Lock

2. Higher priority signals take precedence, and will over-


ride lower priority signals.

3. If the priority is the same or low, it’ll be ignored.


MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION BE -295

OUT SIDE MIRROR CONTROL BY THE SWITCH 2. Replay operation


- When door is unlocked by the keyless under igni-
1. If the mirror direction switch (up, down, left and right) tion off state, it replays the position correspond-
is pressed when mirror selection switch on driver side ing to the keyless code.
power window switch is in outside LH(RH) under ACC - Data related to the replay operation is received
ON condition, then mirror motor moves to the corre- from BCM in CAN communication on CAN line.
sponding direction.
3. Replay prohibit condition
OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY OPERATION BY THE
MEMORY SWITCH - If the mirror switch on the LH side is pressed
- If Ignition switch of the CAN communication data
1. If position switch (POS1 or POS2) is pressed within 5 sent by the IPM is not "Run" or "Start".
seconds after pressing the memory switch under igni- - If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data
tion 2 on, it registers current mirror position. (Switch sent by the FAM is not "P".
module sends in LIN communication). (Memory per- - If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data
mit status lasts for 5 seconds after memory switch ON. sent by the CLUSTER is "3Km/h" or more.
After 5 seconds, memory permits status terminates.
In other words, current position is registered if the po- OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY AND REPLAY
OPERATION BY KEYLESS
sition switch (POS1 or POS2) is turned on, during the
memory permit status). However, RH side mirror po- 1. Memory operation
sition is not registered during the LH side mirror man- - Outside mirror LH position is registered in the
ual switch operation. driver side power window switch when the igni-
tion is turned off from on.
2. Memory permit status is released if any of the follow-
- When door is locked by the keyless, outside mir-
ing conditions is met
ror position is registered corresponding to the
- If 5 seconds is elapsed after the memory switch
keyless code.
is turned on
- Data related to the memory operation is received
- If the ignition 2 is turned off
from BCM in CAN communication.
- When saving is completed
- If Ignition switch of the CAN communication data
2. Replay operation
sent by the IPM is not "Run" or "Start".
- When door is unlocked by the keyless under igni-
- If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data
tion off state, it replays the position correspond-
sent by the FAM is not "P".
ing to the keyless code.
- If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data
- Data related to the replay operation is received
sent by the cluster is "3Km/h" or more.
from BCM in CAN communication on CAN line.
3. Memory is cleared if the battery is removed.
3. Replay prohibit condition
OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY AND REPLAY - When the inhibit "P" switch is OFF.
OPERATION BY KEYLESS - When RH side mirror switch is pressed.
- When mirror switch is pressed after ignition on.
1. Memory operation - When the vehicle speed is over 3km/h
- Outside mirror LH position is registered in the
driver side power window switch when the igni-
tion is turned off from on.
- When door is locked by the keyless, outside mir-
ror position is registered corresponding to the
keyless code.
- Data related to the memory operation is received
from BCM in CAN communication.
BE -296 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AUTO REVERSE FUNCTION

Shift MIR Position


Select
No. Operation Lever Manipulation Result
SW L R

MIR L:Auto reverse to


position (A-5 )
1 LH P Position A Position B
MIR R:Auto reverse to
position (B-5 )
Changing the
Basic
shift lever from MIR L:NO change
Operation
2 RH P Position A Position B "P" to "R" MIR R:Auto reverse to
position (B-5 )
MIR L:NO change
3 N P Position A Position B
MIR R:NO change
Result of Result of MIR L:Return to position (A)
4 LH R
Returning No.1 No.2 Changing the MIR R:Return to position (B)
after Basic No.1 is shift lever from
Operation Result of "R" to "P" MIR L:NO change
5 RH R being
No.2 MIR R:Return to position (B)
performed

FAIL SAFE FUNCTION SEAT MANUAL SWIITCH

1. If the sensor does not move more than 60mV for If Seat switch is controlled, seat control message is sent
the input changes (5 second operation) of the posi- to seat.
tion sensor although the motor is operating, automatic
control will stop. COURTESY LAMP

2. The mirror operation signal cannot be displayed into 1. If driver’s door is opened, RAM changes door open
the same direction for more than 15 seconds. (When Message to ON and Courtesy lamp is ON by DDM.
the mirror is replacing to the saved position or the
2. If driver’s door is closed, RAM changes door open
switch is manually pressed)
Message to Off and Courtesy lamp is OFF gradually
3. Monitoring the replacing time by DDM.(5±0.5sec)
- If the replacing operation does not stop within 40
3. During dim out, If IGN changes to ON or door is closed
seconds, the mirror motor will not outputted and
while Ignition switch is ON, Courtesy lamp is OFF im-
the replacing operation will stop.
mediately.
IMS SWITCH
4. If Key reminder switch is OFF and door is opened for
1. If it’s satisfied with the followings 20min, Courtesy lamp is OFF immediately.

FUEL FILLER DOOR OPEN


1) Can communication Data ignition switch sent by
IPM is "RUN" When the fuel filler door open switch is turned on, this data
is uploaded to the bus through CAN communication.
2) Can communication Data Inhibit switch sent by
FAM is "P" DEFOG CONTROL (O/S MIRROR HEAT LINE)

3) Can communication Data vehicle speed sent by If rear defog switch is on while IGN is ON, rear defog
CLUSTER is under "3Km/h" control of IPM is ON and O/S Mirror Defog is ON by
DDM,ADM.
2. If SET switch is ON, IMS message is SET.

3. If POSITION switch is ON within 5sec since SET


switch is ON, IMS message will be sent to MEMORY1
or MEMORY2.
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION BE -297

RESCUE MODE

1. The condition to run RESCUE MODE is listed below.


- Ignition switch Message is in RUN or IGN switch
is ON.
- Any signal received from of park tail head lamp,
front wiper control message is received as IN-
VALID or CAN line from IPM is not normal.
- Drive door courtesy lamp control message is sent
as INVALID or Can Line from RAM is not normal

2. If RESCUE MODE runs, operation is as follows.


- Door unlock is ON for 0.5sec
- OSRVM Defogger is ON for 20min.
- Illumination is ON continuously.
- Other functions are the same as NORMAL mode.

3. If Ignition switch Message is OFF/ACC or IGN switch


is OFF or can line from IPM,FAM,RAM is normal, Res-
cue mode is stopped.
BE -298 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ASSIST DOOR MODULE - If any door is on "UNLOCK"

2. After LOCK output, if any door is not locked, there will


DESCRIPTION EB62BE91
be a series of three Lock output every 0.5sec.
The assist door module is a part of CAN, and performs 3. If all doors are locked during a series of three output
CAN communication with the BCM, FAM, IPM, RAM, signals, output will be stopped.
DDM, and IMS. The driver can control the power window,
mirror, door(lock/unlock) by using buttons of the ADM on 4. If any door is not locked after a series of three output
the door of the driver’s seat. signals, output will be stopped.

1. Operating the power window by buttons KEY REMINDER

2. Central Door LOCK/UNLOCK function 1. If door is locked by using door lock knob after opening
door while IGN KEY is inserted to KEY CYLINDER,
3. Manually operating the mirror position by the manual Unlock output will be for 1sec and there will be a series
SW (Up, Down, Right, and Left) of three output signals every 0.5sec if door condition
is "Lock".
4. Saving and replacing the mirror position by the mem-
ory switch → For 2 persons 2. If Key Reminder unlock message is "SHORT UN-
LOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 0.5sec.
5. Out side mirror AUTO reverse operation
3. If Key Reminder unlock message is "LONG UN-
6. Door courtesy lamp control LOCK", DOOR UNLOCK lasts for 1sec.
7. Out side mirror defog control 4. Remained action goes on though Key Reminder Un-
lock message changes to "OFF".
8. Illumination control
PRIORITY OF DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
CONTROL FUNCTION E7F98F18
1. Crash Unlock > Auto Door Lock > Key Reminder >
Central Door Lock
POWER WINDOW CONTROL
2. Higher priority signals take precedence, and will over-
1. This switch controls power window up/down from as-
ride lower priority signals.
sist side.
- According to the input of assist Door module
3. If the priority is the same or low, it’ll be ignored.
window, up/down switch, output window motor
up/down. OUT SIDE MIRROR FOLD/UNFOLD POWER
- Power window up/down control from assist side. CONTROL

2. Timer function 1. Supply folding power for 30sec after ACC ON or ACC
Power window switch can be controlled for 30 sec- OFF.
onds after the ignition is turned off. This function stops
immediately even within 30 seconds if the front door 2. FOLD/UNFOLD operation is controlled by fold switch.
is opened. OUT SIDE MIRROR CONTROL BY THE SWITCH
CRASH UNLOCK
1. Manual control of left outside mirror
1. Under the condition "IGN ON", if Crash Sensor mes- If the mirror direction switch (up, down, left and right)
sage from IPM is ON, Door UNLOCK is output.(5 ± is pressed when mirror selection switch on driver side
0.5sec) power window switch is in outside LH under ACC ON
condition, then mirror motor moves to the correspond-
AUTO DOOR LOCK ing direction.

1. If the vehicle is under any of the following conditions 2. Manual control of right outside mirror
and the condition lasts for 3sec, all doors is locked. If the mirror direction switch (up, down, left and right)
If message from IPM is "Door Lock Control = LOCK is pressed when mirror selection switch on driver side
ALL", it will be locked for 0.5sec. power window switch is in outside RH under ACC ON
- IGN "RUN" or "START" condition, then operating signal is sent to passenger
- ALT L ON (Engine is running) side power window switch through CAN communica-
- Speed of the vehicle is 40Km/h tion.
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION BE -299

OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY OPERATION BY THE 1) If the mirror switch on the LH side is pressed
MEMORY SWITCH
2) If Ignition switch of the CAN communication data
1. IMS Message from DDM is sent to RETURN1 or RE- sent by the IPM is not "Run".
TURN2, out side mirror returns to the position stored.
3) If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data
2. Memory permit status is released if any of the follow- sent by the FAM is not "P".
ing conditions is met
- If 5 seconds is elapsed after the memory switch 4) If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data
is turned on sent by the CLUSTER is "3Km/h".
- If the ignition 2 is turned off
- When saving is completed OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY AND REPLAY
- If Ignition switch of the CAN communication data OPERATION BY KEYLESS
sent by the IPM is not "Run" or "Start".
1. Memory operation
- If Inhibit switch of the CAN communication data
- If the ignition is turned off after being on, the po-
sent by the FAM is not "P".
sition of the O/S mirror RH is saved in the switch
- If vehicle speed of the CAN communication data
ASSY power window main.
sent by the cluster is "3Km/h" or more.
- If the door was keyless-locked, the outside mirror
RH position is saved corresponding to the key-
3. Memory is cleared if the battery is removed
less code.
OUTSIDE MIRROR MEMORY AND REPLAY
OPERATION BY THE MEMORY SWITCH 2. Replay operation
- If the door is keyless-unlocked while the IGN SW
1. IMS message from DDM is sent to RETURN1 or RE- is off, replacing is made to the saved position cor-
TURN2, O/S MIRROR returns to the position stored. responding to the keyless code.
2. Replacing not stored position doesn’t work.
3. Replay prohibit condition
3. If RETURN Message is sent during replacing, the last - When the inhibit "P" switch is OFF
Message has priority. - When RH side mirror switch is pressed
- When mirror switch is pressed after ignition on
4. Replacing Prohibition Conditions. - When the vehicle speed is over 3km/h

AUTO REVERSE FUNCTION

Se- Shift MIR Position


Manipula-
No. Operation lect Lever Result
L R tion
SW
MIR L:Auto reverse to
position (A-5 )
1 LH P Position A Position B
MIR R:Auto reverse to
Changing position (B-5 )
the shift
Basic Operation MIR L:NO change
lever from
2 RH P Position A Position B MIR R:Auto reverse to
"P" to "R"
position (B-5 )
MIR L:NO change
3 N P Position A Position B
MIR R:NO change
Result of Result of MIR L:Return to position (A)
4 LH R Changing
No.1 No.2 MIR R:Return to position (B)
Returning after the shift
Basic Operation No.1 is lever from
Result of MIR L:NO change
5 RH R being "R" to "P"
No.2 MIR R:Return to position (B)
performed
BE -300 BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

FAIL SAFE FUNCTION REPLACEMENT E7E5B040

1. If the sensor does not move more than 60mV for the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
input changes (5 second operation) of the position
sensor although the motor is operating, it will be con- 2. Remove the front door lower panel (Refer to the Body
sidered there is a harness cutting, motor breakdown, group - front door)
or sensor breakdown and automatic control will stop.
3. Remove the door module (A) mounting screws (5EA)
2. The mirror operation signal cannot be displayed into after disconnecting module connector (3EA)
the same direction for more than 15 seconds. (When
the mirror is replacing to the saved position or the
switch is manually pressed)

3. Monitoring the replacing time


- If the replacing operation does not stop within 40
seconds, the mirror motor will not outputted and
the replacing operation will stop.

COURTESY LAMP

1. If assist’s door is opened, RAM changes door open


Message to ON and Courtesy lamp is ON by ADM. A

2. If assist’s door is closed, RAM changes door open


Message to Off and Courtesy lamp is OFF gradually
by ADM.(5±0.5sec) ATKF284A

3. During dim out, If IGN changes to ON or door is closed 4. Remove the door module (DDM/ADM) (A) from the
while Ignition switch is ON, Courtesy lamp is OFF im- front door trim panel.
mediately.

4. If Key reminder switch is OFF and door is opened for


20min, Courtesy lamp is OFF immediately.

DEFOG CONTROL (O/S MIRROR HEAT LINE)

If rear defog switch is on while IGN is ON, rear defog con-


trol of IPM is ON and O/S Mirror Defog is ON by DDM,
ADM.
RESCUE MODE

1. The condition to run RESCUE MODE is listed below.


- Ignition switch Message is in RUN or IGN switch A
is ON.
- Any signal received from of park tail head lamp, ATKF284B
front wiper control message is received as IN-
VALID or CAN line from IPM is not normal.
- Drive door courtesy lamp control message is sent
as INVALID or Can Line from RAM is not normal.

2. If RESCUE MODE runs, operation is as follows.


- Door unlock is ON for 0.5sec
- OSRVM Defogger is ON for 20min.
- Illumination is ON continuously.
- Other functions are the same as NORMAL mode.

3. If Ignition switch Message is OFF/ACC or IGN switch


is OFF or can line from IPM,FAM,RAM is normal, Res-
cue mode is stopped.

You might also like